339
User Manual AlvariSTAR Infrastructure Software Version: 6.0 December 2012 P/N 216044

Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Embed Size (px)

DESCRIPTION

Manual da TelRad sobre antenas de telecomunicações

Citation preview

Page 1: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

User Manual

AlvariSTAR

Infrastructure Software Version: 6.0December 2012P/N 216044

Page 2: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Document History

Document History

Topic Description Date Issued

Version 6.0 with the new GUI is regarded as the first publication. December 2012

iiAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 3: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Legal Rights

Legal Rights© Copyright 2013 Alvarion Ltd. All rights reserved.

The material contained herein is proprietary, privileged, and confidential and owned by Alvarion or its third party licensors. No disclosure thereof shall be made to third parties without the express written permission of Alvarion Ltd.

Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.

Trade Names

Alvarion®, BreezeCOM®, WALKair®, WALKnet®, BreezeNET®, BreezeACCESS®, BreezeMAX®,

BreezeLITE®, 4Motion® and/or other products and/or services referenced here in are either registered trademarks, trademarks or service marks of Alvarion Ltd.

All other names are or may be the trademarks of their respective owners.

“WiMAX Forum” is a registered trademark of the WiMAX Forum. “WiMAX”, the WiMAX Forum logo, “WiMAX Forum Certified”, and the WiMAX Forum Certified logo are trademarks of the WiMAX Forum.

Statement of Conditions

The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Alvarion Ltd. shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual or equipment supplied with it.

Warranties and Disclaimers

All Alvarion Ltd. (“Alvarion”) products purchased from Alvarion or through any of Alvarion's authorized resellers are subject to the following warranty and product liability terms and conditions.

Exclusive Warranty

(a) Alvarion warrants that the Product hardware it supplies and the tangible media on which any software is installed, under normal use and conditions, will be free from significant defects in materials and workmanship for a period of fourteen (14) months from the date of shipment of a given Product to Purchaser (the “Warranty Period”). Alvarion will, at its sole option and as Purchaser's sole remedy, repair or replace any defective Product in accordance with Alvarion' standard R&R procedure.

(b) With respect to the Firmware, Alvarion warrants the correct functionality according to the attached documentation, for a period of fourteen (14) month from invoice date (the “Warranty Period”). During the Warranty Period, Alvarion may release to its Customers firmware updates, which include additional performance improvements and/or bug fixes, upon availability (the “Warranty”). Bug fixes, temporary patches and/or workarounds may be supplied as Firmware updates.

Additional hardware, if required, to install or use Firmware updates must be purchased by the Customer. Alvarion will be obligated to support solely the two (2) most recent Software major releases.

ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE UNDER THIS WARRANTY IF ITS TESTING AND EXAMINATION DISCLOSE THAT THE ALLEGED DEFECT IN THE PRODUCT DOES NOT EXIST OR WAS CAUSED BY PURCHASER'S OR ANY THIRD PERSON'S MISUSE, NEGLIGENCE, IMPROPER INSTALLATION OR IMPROPER TESTING, UNAUTHORIZED ATTEMPTS TO REPAIR, OR ANY OTHER CAUSE BEYOND THE RANGE OF THE INTENDED USE, OR BY ACCIDENT, FIRE, LIGHTNING OR OTHER HAZARD.

Disclaimer

iiiAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 4: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Legal Rights

(a) The Software is sold on an “AS IS” basis. Alvarion, its affiliates or its licensors MAKE NO WARRANTIES, WHATSOEVER, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE AND THE ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NON-INFRINGEMENT WITH RESPECT TO THE SOFTWARE. UNITS OF PRODUCT (INCLUDING ALL THE SOFTWARE) DELIVERED TO PURCHASER HEREUNDER ARE NOT FAULT-TOLERANT AND ARE NOT DESIGNED, MANUFACTURED OR INTENDED FOR USE OR RESALE IN APPLICATIONS WHERE THE FAILURE, MALFUNCTION OR INACCURACY OF PRODUCTS CARRIES A RISK OF DEATH OR BODILY INJURY OR SEVERE PHYSICAL OR ENVIRONMENTAL DAMAGE (“HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES”). HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES MAY INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO, USE AS PART OF ON-LINE CONTROL SYSTEMS IN HAZARDOUS ENVIRONMENTS REQUIRING FAIL-SAFE PERFORMANCE, SUCH AS IN THE OPERATION OF NUCLEAR FACILITIES, AIRCRAFT NAVIGATION OR COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS, AIR TRAFFIC CONTROL, LIFE SUPPORT MACHINES, WEAPONS SYSTEMS OR OTHER APPLICATIONS REPRESENTING A SIMILAR DEGREE OF POTENTIAL HAZARD. ALVARION SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTY OF FITNESS FOR HIGH RISK ACTIVITIES.

(b) PURCHASER'S SOLE REMEDY FOR BREACH OF THE EXPRESS WARRANTIES ABOVE SHALL BE REPLACEMENT OR REFUND OF THE PURCHASE PRICE AS SPECIFIED ABOVE, AT ALVARION'S OPTION. TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES SET FORTH IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, EITHER IN FACT OR BY OPERATION OF LAW, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO WARRANTIES, TERMS OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, CORRESPONDENCE WITH DESCRIPTION, NON-INFRINGEMENT, AND ACCURACY OF INFORMATION GENERATED. ALL OF WHICH ARE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMED. ALVARION' WARRANTIES HEREIN RUN ONLY TO PURCHASER, AND ARE NOT EXTENDED TO ANY THIRD PARTIES. ALVARION NEITHER ASSUMES NOR AUTHORIZES ANY OTHER PERSON TO ASSUME FOR IT ANY OTHER LIABILITY IN CONNECTION WITH THE SALE, INSTALLATION, MAINTENANCE OR USE OF ITS PRODUCTS.

Limitation of Liability

(a) ALVARION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO THE PURCHASER OR TO ANY THIRD PARTY, FOR ANY LOSS OF PROFITS, LOSS OF USE, INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR FOR ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL, PUNITIVE OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY KIND, WHETHER ARISING UNDER BREACH OF CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT LIABILITY OR OTHERWISE AND WHETHER BASED ON THIS AGREEMENT OR OTHERWISE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.

(b) TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES HEREUNDER OF ALVARION OR ITS EMPLOYEES OR AGENTS EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THE PRODUCT BY PURCHASER, NOR SHALL THE AGGREGATE LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES TO ALL PARTIES REGARDING ANY PRODUCT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE PAID FOR THAT PRODUCT BY THAT PARTY (EXCEPT IN THE CASE OF A BREACH OF A PARTY'S CONFIDENTIALITY OBLIGATIONS).

ivAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 5: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Important Notice

Important NoticeThis user manual is delivered subject to the following conditions and restrictions:

This manual contains proprietary information belonging to Alvarion Ltd. Such information is supplied

solely for the purpose of assisting properly authorized users of the respective Alvarion products.

No part of its contents may be used for any other purpose, disclosed to any person or firm or

reproduced by any means, electronic and mechanical, without the express prior written permission of

Alvarion Ltd.

The text and graphics are for the purpose of illustration and reference only. The specifications on

which they are based are subject to change without notice.

The software described in this document is furnished under a license. The software may be used or

copied only in accordance with the terms of that license.

Information in this document is subject to change without notice. Corporate and individual names

and data used in examples herein are fictitious unless otherwise noted.

Alvarion Ltd. reserves the right to alter the equipment specifications and descriptions in this

publication without prior notice. No part of this publication shall be deemed to be part of any

contract or warranty unless specifically incorporated by reference into such contract or warranty.

The information contained herein is merely descriptive in nature, and does not constitute an offer for

the sale of the product described herein.

Any changes or modifications of equipment, including opening of the equipment not expressly

approved by Alvarion Ltd. will void equipment warranty and any repair thereafter shall be charged for.

It could also void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

vAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 6: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

About This Manual

About This Manual

This manual describes the AlvariSTAR management system (referred to as Network Management System) and the AlvariCRAFT Local CRAFT Utility. The manual describes the full functionality of the Carrier-class management system. Unless otherwise stated, the descriptions apply to both applications.

Limitations on AlvariCRAFT due to the single device restriction are noted in a Note specific to the application, as follows:

This User Manual comprises the following chapters:

Chapter 1- “Introduction”: Provides an overview of the management system and its functionality.

Chapter 2 - “The Equipment Manager”: Describes the Equipment manager and how to use it for

viewing equipment details in either grid or map view and initiating various actions that enable

comprehensive management of equipment in the network.

Chapter 3 - “The Active Events Manager”: Provides details of currently active events (open alarms)

received by the management system from managed devices, enabling management and diagnosis of

these events.

Chapter 4 - “Configuration Operations”:

» “The Offline Project Configuration Manager”: In the current release applicable only for

COMPACT. Describes how to manage Offline Projects and nictitate a Mass Configuration Wizard

for generating Project-based Offline Configuration files.

» “The Offline Building Blocks Manager”: In the current release applicable only for COMPACT.

Describes how to manage Offline Building Blocks for Offline Projects.

» “The Configuration Templates Manager”: Describes how to manage equipment configuration

templates that can be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the

template-based Multiple Configuration task.

» “The GPS Chains Manager”: In the current release applicable only for Extreme. Describes how to

manage GPS chains.

This feature is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

viAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 7: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

About This Manual

» “The Locations Manager”: Describe how to manage locations that can be assigned to specific

devices for improved equipment management functionality. Location may also be assigned to

users to enable domain-based management capabilities.

Chapter 5 - “Events”:

» “Event History Manager”: Describes how to use the Event History manager that provides details

of all events that occurred in the system and easy management access to relevant devices.

» “NBI Events Forwarding Manager”: Describes how to manage North Bound Interfaces for

forwarding events to other management systems.

» “NBI Policy Manager”: Describes how to manage policies for NBI Event Forwarding.

» “Event Templates Manager”: Describes how to manage event templates that define how the

system processes different events.

» “Script Commands Manager”: Describes how to manage script commands triggered by relevant

template-matched events.

Chapter 6- “MS Services”:

» “MS Manager”: Defines how to manage the MSs in the network and open other relevant

management applications.

» “The MS Connection Maintenance Manager”: In the current release applicable only for certain

4Motion devices. Describes how to retrieve data for a single MS or for all MSs served by a specific

ASN-GW and how to force de-registration of one or multiple MSs.

Chapter 7 - “Management”:

» “Discovery Manager”: Describes how to manage definitions for mass discovery of managed

devices.

» “Data Files Manager”: Describes how to manage configuration and performance files stored in

the database and how to initiate different actions that use these files.

» “The Contacts Manager”: Describe how to manage contacts for managed network elements.

» “The Tasks Manager”: Describes how to manage system-wide operations and product line

dependent tasks.

» “Preferences Manager”: Describes how to set values for certain global parameters, define

parameters for connecting to other management applications, define charts/graphs to be

viiAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 8: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

About This Manual

displayed in the Home page, and initiate certain import/export actions of files with location details

of MSs or GPS coordinates information.

Chapter 8 - “Administration”:

» “Users Manager”: Describes how to manage users and associated details such as passwords,

profile membership and contact information.

» “User Profiles Manager”: Describes how to manage user profiles and functional permissions

assigned to them.

» “User Sessions Manager”: Describes the information available for currently logged in users and

how to send messages to logged in users or terminate sessions.

» “The Audit Logs Manager”: Describes the available information in records of events related to the

management system’s database and how to export the logged data to an external Comma

Separated Value (CSV) file.

» “Licenses Manager”: Describes the information available for existing licenses, how to add new

licenses and how to activate a new license.

» “Password Policy Manager”: Describes how to set general policies for user passwords.

» “User Domain Manager”: Describes how to manage optional domains to users, thus limiting the

network visibility of certain users.

» “External Entities Mapping Manager”: Applicable only if LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access

Protocol) connection is enabled. Describes how to map existing LDAP entities to specific user

profiles (if an external LDAP server is to be used for user account management).

Chapter 9 - “StarSuite”:

» “Reports Manager”: Describes how to generate various inventory and configuration reports.

» “Charts Manager”: Describes the various available graphs and charts that provide summary

status information for all managed devices.

Appendix A - “Watchdog”: Describes the Watchdog application used for monitoring the NMS,

database and LDAP servers.

Appendix B - “Connecting to an External LDAP Server”: Describe how to connect AlvariSTAR to an

external LDAP server.

viiAlvariSTAR User Manual

Page 9: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Contents

A

Contents

Chapter 1 - Introduction........................................................................................ 1

1.1 Starting the Client................................................................................................2

1.2 Logging In ............................................................................................................2

1.3 Logging Out or Client Shutdown ...........................................................................3

1.4 Post Installation Checklist ....................................................................................3

1.5 The NMS Client Screen .........................................................................................5

1.6 The Home Page ..................................................................................................17

1.7 Using the Grid View ............................................................................................18

1.8 The About Window.............................................................................................21

1.9 Changing the Password ......................................................................................22

1.10 Common Control Buttons/Icons.........................................................................23

1.11 Single Device Configuration (Device Manager) ...................................................23

Chapter 2 - The Equipment Manager .................................................................... 27

2.1 Introduction to the Equipment Manager .............................................................28

2.2 Switching between Grid and Map Views ..............................................................29

2.3 Equipment List Grid View....................................................................................29

2.4 Map View ...........................................................................................................31

2.5 Equipment Details ..............................................................................................36

2.6 Equipment Actions Panel ....................................................................................43

2.7 Find Equipment Panel .........................................................................................46

2.8 Network Element Discovery................................................................................47

2.9 The Network Element Editor...............................................................................50

2.10 The Common attributes Editor ..........................................................................54

lvariSTAR User Manual ix

Page 10: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Contents

A

2.11 Real-Time Performance Viewer..........................................................................55

2.12 Configuration History Request and Report ........................................................59

2.13 The Equipment Selector Window .......................................................................61

Chapter 3 - The Active Events Manager ................................................................ 62

3.1 Introduction to the Active Events Manager .........................................................63

3.2 Active Events Main Area .....................................................................................63

3.3 Event Details......................................................................................................68

3.4 Active Events Actions Panel................................................................................72

3.5 Find Events Panel ...............................................................................................73

Chapter 4 - Configuration Operations .................................................................. 76

4.1 The Offline Project Configuration Manager .........................................................77

4.2 The Offline Building Blocks Manager ...................................................................82

4.3 The Configuration Templates Manager................................................................84

4.4 The GPS Chains Manager ....................................................................................89

4.5 The Locations Manager.......................................................................................95

Chapter 5 - Events..............................................................................................104

5.1 Event History Manager .....................................................................................105

5.2 NBI Events Forwarding Manager........................................................................116

5.3 NBI Policy Manager...........................................................................................121

5.4 Event Templates Manager.................................................................................128

5.5 Script Commands Manager ...............................................................................141

Chapter 6 - MS Services......................................................................................145

6.1 MS Manager .....................................................................................................146

6.2 The MS Connection Maintenance Manager ........................................................156

Chapter 7 - Management ....................................................................................165

7.1 Discovery Manager ...........................................................................................166

7.2 Data Files Manager...........................................................................................174

lvariSTAR User Manual x

Page 11: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Contents

A

7.3 The Contacts Manager......................................................................................188

7.4 The Tasks Manager...........................................................................................194

7.5 Preferences Manager........................................................................................231

Chapter 8 - Administration .................................................................................252

8.1 Users Manager .................................................................................................253

8.2 User Profiles Manager ......................................................................................269

8.3 User Sessions Manager.....................................................................................279

8.4 The Audit Logs Manager ...................................................................................282

8.5 Licenses Manager.............................................................................................285

8.6 Password Policy Manager..................................................................................290

8.7 User Domain Manager ......................................................................................293

8.8 External Entities Mapping Manager ...................................................................295

Chapter 9 - StarSuite..........................................................................................298

9.1 Reports Manager..............................................................................................299

9.2 Charts Manager ................................................................................................308

Appendix A - Watchdog .....................................................................................320

A.1 The Watchdog Application ................................................................................322

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server ..........................................324

B.1 The LDAP Server Configuration File...................................................................326

B.2 Open LDAP Configuration .................................................................................327

B.3 Active Directory Configuration..........................................................................328

lvariSTAR User Manual xi

Page 12: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - Introduction

In This Chapter:

“Starting the Client” on page 2

“Logging In” on page 2

“Logging Out or Client Shutdown” on page 3

“Post Installation Checklist” on page 3

“The NMS Client Screen” on page 5

“The Home Page” on page 17

“Using the Grid View” on page 18

“The About Window” on page 21

“Changing the Password” on page 22

“Common Control Buttons/Icons” on page 23

“Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)” on page 23

Page 13: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionStarting the ClientChapter 1 - Introduction Starting the Client

1.1 Starting the Client

To start the client, open a web browser and connect to the following URL:

http://<NMS_server_IP_address>:8080/webstart.

The currently supported web browsers are:

Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) release 8 and higher

Mozila Firefox release 15.0 and higher

Google Chrome release 22.0 and higher.

The Client applet will be loaded to the client station. After the client application is started, the Login

prompt window will be displayed.

1.2 Logging In

To log in, type a valid user name and password at the login prompt. The client application will open,

displaying the Home page.

The default users and passwords are as follows:

INFORMATION

For the Local CRAFT Utility connect to http://localhost:8080/webstart.

Figure 1-1: Login Prompt

Default User Name Default Passwords

admin admin

manager manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 2

Page 14: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionLogging Out or Client ShutdownChapter 1 - Introduction Logging Out or Client Shutdown

The number of unsuccessful attempts to enter the correct password before the system blocks the login is

limited. The default number of permitted attempts is 3. An account may also be suspended by the

system administrator. For details on re-activating suspended accounts refer to the Reset Password action

in “Users Actions Panel” on page 256.

After first login a Change Password window is opened, forcing a change of password.

1.3 Logging Out or Client Shutdown

Logging out (by clicking on the Logout ( ) icon on the upper right corner of the application screen)

keeps the application running but disable access to the client, preventing unauthorized persons from

using it. The Login prompt is displayed enabling to log in again without the need to restart the client

application.

The Exit feature (using the X icon displayed on the upper right corner of the browser window, or use the

Alt+F4 shortcut) shuts down the client application. To re-run the client application you should reload the

client applet (see Starting the Client above).

After an inactivity time-out of 5 minutes automatic logout will be performing. A warning message

indicating the time before logout will be displayed starting 15 seconds before the automatic logout

action.

1.4 Post Installation Checklist

This section includes:

Licenses

Devices Configuration

SW Upgrade Files

Initial Configuration

Enabling discovery of equipment that should be managed

1.4.1 Licenses

The default demo license is valid for 90 days and includes licenses for two management system clients

and a certain amount of managed devices. It does not support licensed features.

To obtain a permanent license according to your needs, contact your product reseller. New licenses

should be saved in the \<Management_System>\filesystem\license folder of the NMS server. For details

on loading and activating licenses, refer to “Licenses Manager” on page 285.

observer observer

Default User Name Default Passwords

AlvariSTAR User Manual 3

Page 15: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionPost Installation ChecklistChapter 1 - Introduction Post Installation Checklist

1.4.2 Devices Configuration

To discover and properly manage devices, certain parameters must first be properly configured in the

managed devices. For details refer to the Discovery section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

1.4.3 SW Upgrade Files

Software Upgrade files for the managed devices need to be stored on the NMS Server in the

management system firmware repository folder located under \<Management_System>\file

system\firmware\<product-line>. The product line name is device dependant:

COMPACT: ngp

4Motion: wm

Extreme: pico

1.4.4 Initial Configuration

After completing the installation of a new management system, the system administrator should login

as admin user (see Logging In above) and perform the following tasks:

1 Design the equipment location hierarchy. Define locations and sub-locations (refer to “The Locations

Manager” on page 95). You may also define contacts to be associated later with specific equipment

(see “The Contacts Manager” on page 188).

2 Define general password policy (refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290).

3 If needed, define new user profiles (refer to “User Profiles Manager” on page 269), users (refer to

“Users Manager” on page 253), and users’ domains (refer to “User Domain Manager” on page 293).

4 In the Discovery tab (refer to “Discovery Manager” on page 166) define all necessary parameters for

discovering devices that should be managed by the system and initiate the Network Scan task (refer

to “Network Scan Task” on page 210) for discovering these devices.

1.4.5 Enabling discovery of equipment that should be managed

To enable discovery by the management system and support remote management of the equipment

some basic parameters must be configured locally using either Telnet or the Local CRAFT Utility.

Refer to the Commissioning section in the relevant System Manuals for details on the minimal

configuration required for enabling discovery and remote management of the equipment.

INFORMATIONThe firmware repository folder is created automatically for certain device drivers. For other device drivers it should be created manually.

Use forward slashes in UNIX systems.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 4

Page 16: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

Note that if the management system is behind a NAT router, the NAT Outside IP address (the IP of the

router’s interface connected in the direction of the managed device LAN) must be defined in the device

as a Trap Manager, with traps sending enabled. In the NAT router, Port Forwarding (NAT Traversal) must

be configured for UDP and TCP ports 161 and 162 from Outside IP (connected to the managed device’s

LAN) to Inside IP (connected to the management system’s LAN).

1.5 The NMS Client Screen

After logging in, the NMS Client Screen is displayed, providing access to all functions. By default it is

opened displaying the Home tab with immediate access to two other fixed tabs: Equipment and Active

Events.

The typical NMS Client screen includes some or all of the following sections:

Tabs Ribbon

Main Menu

Status & Info

Main Area

Details Panel

Find Panel

Actions Panel

Management Systems Icons

AlvariSTAR User Manual 5

Page 17: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

1.5.1 Tabs Ribbon

Most of the management functions are organized as tabs. A new function tab is typically opened by

selecting the relevant option in the Main Menu (see below). The Tabs Ribbon displays all the currently

open management functions. The currently active tab is highlighted blue, all other open tabs are grey.

The following tabs Home, Equipment and Active Events tabs are always available and cannot be closed:

Home: Provides a high-level graphical view of the entire system (see “The Home Page” on page 17).

Equipment: Provides a view of all devices that can be managed by the specific user, with some general

information on managed devices and access to various functions that enable comprehensive

management of equipment in the network (see “The Equipment Manager” on page 27).

Active Events: Provides details of currently active events (open alarms) received by the management

system from devices that can be managed by the specific user, enabling management and diagnosis of

these events (see “The Active Events Manager” on page 62).

All other tabs can be closed by clicking on the X sign located in the top right corner of the tab.

If the number of open tabs is larger than required for proper presentation of tab textual headers

(depends on actual screen width), excessive tabs headers are hidden. Left / right arrows are presented at

the right end of the tabs ribbon, indicating the presence of additional open tab headers in the specific

direction(s), and enabling left / right scrolling.

Figure 1-2: The NMS Client Screen (Equipment Tab)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 6

Page 18: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

1.5.2 Main Menu

The main menu contains all menus and their options, providing access to the main management

functions.

To open a menu, click on the menu name or on the down-arrow located on the right side of the menu

item. The available options will be displayed.

To hide the menu options click again on the menu name or on the up-arrow located on the right side of

the menu item. You can also click anywhere in the screen area to hide the currently open menu options.

Click on an option to open the applicable tab (or window) and hide the menu options. If the relevant tab

is already open, it will become the active tab.

The complete list of management functions available through the menu bar are described below. Note

that the actually available menus/options depend on the installed device driver(s) and the functional

permissions assigned to the logged in user (see “User Profiles Manager” on page 269) and on the

installed device drivers.

Menu Option

Configuration Operations

Offline Project Configuration: In the current release applicable only for COMPACT. Enables managing Offline Projects, creating new Projects and initiating a Mass Configuration Wizard for generating Project-based Offline Configuration files. Refer to “The Offline Project Configuration Manager” on page 77.

Offline Building Blocks: In the current release applicable only for COMPACT. Enables managing Offline Building Blocks for Offline Projects. Refer to “The Offline Building Blocks Manager” on page 82.

Configuration Templates: Enables managing equipment configuration templates that can be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the template-based Multiple Configuration task. Refer to “The Configuration Templates Manager” on page 84.

GPS Chains: In the current release applicable only for Extreme. Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables managing GPS chains. Refer to “The GPS Chains Manager” on page 89.

Locations: Enables managing equipment locations. Refer to “The Locations Manager” on page 95.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 7

Page 19: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

Events Event History: Displays a list of all events and alarms that occurred in the system, providing easy management access to relevant devices. Refer to “Event History Manager” on page 105.

NBI Events Forwarding: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Enables management of North Bound Interfaces to other management systems. Refer to “NBI Events Forwarding Manager” on page 116.

NBI Policy: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility Enables management of policies to be used by NBI Events Forwarding interfaces. Refer to “NBI Policy Manager” on page 121.

Event Templates: Enables managing event templates that define how the system processes different events, including execution of of script commands. Refer to “Event Templates Manager” on page 128.

Script Commands: Enables managing script commands triggered by relevant template-matched events. Refer to “Script Commands Manager” on page 141.

MS Services MS: Enables viewing the MSs in the network, providing links to relevant management applications. Refer to “MS Manager” on page 146.

MS Connection Maintenance: In the current release applicable only for certain 4Motion devices. Enables display of data for a single MS or for all MSs served by a specific ASN-GW. Enables also forced de-registration of a single or multiple MSs. Refer to “MS Manager” on page 146.

Menu Option

AlvariSTAR User Manual 8

Page 20: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

Management Discovery: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables managing IP address ranges or subnets and global SNMP Read and Write community pairs to be used for discovery of network elements. Refer to “Discovery Manager” on page 166.

Data Files: Enables managing configuration and performance files stored in the database. Refer to “Data Files Manager” on page 174.

Contacts: Enabling managing contacts for managed network elements. Refer to “The Contacts Manager” on page 188.

Tasks: Enables managing system-wide operations and product line dependent tasks. Refer to “The Tasks Manager” on page 194.

Preferences: Enables setting values for certain global parameters, defining parameters for connecting to other management applications, defining charts/graphs to be displayed in the Home page, and initiating certain import/export actions of files with location details of MSs or GPS coordinates information. Refer to “Preferences Manager” on page 231.

Menu Option

AlvariSTAR User Manual 9

Page 21: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

Administration Users: Enables managing users and associated details such as passwords, profile membership and contact information. Refer to “Users Manager” on page 253.

User Profiles: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables managing user profiles and functional permissions assigned to them. Refer to “User Profiles Manager” on page 269.

User Sessions: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables viewing information on the currently logged in users, sending messages to logged in users or terminating sessions. Refer to “User Sessions Manager” on page 279.

Audit Logs: Enables viewing recorded events related to the management system’s database and exporting the logged data to an external Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. Refer to “The Audit Logs Manager” on page 282.

Licenses: Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. Enables viewing information about existing licenses, adding new licenses and activating a new license. Refer to “Licenses Manager” on page 285.

Password Policy: Enables setting general policies for user passwords. Refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290.

User Domains: Enables allocating location visibility domains to each user that is not an administrator (administrators are always able to see all network elements in every location). Refer to“User Domain Manager” on page 293.

External Entities Mapping: Applicable only if LDAP connection is enabled. Enables mapping existing LDAP entities to specific user profiles (if an external LDAP server is used for user account management). Refer to “External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295.

StarSuite Report: Enables generating various inventory and configuration reports. Refer to “Reports Manager” on page 299.

Charts: Enables viewing and managing various graphs and charts providing summary status information for all managed devices. Refer to “Charts Manager” on page 308.

StarQuality: A cut-through link that enables opening StarQuality (if available) in a separate window.

StarACS: A cut-through link that enables opening StarACS (if available) in a separate window.

Menu Option

AlvariSTAR User Manual 10

Page 22: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

1.5.3 Status & Info

The Status & Info section is located at the upper right corner of the application screens, and contains the

following components:

The name of the logged in user. Click on the user name to open a drop-down menu enabling

selection of the Change Password option (see “Changing the Password” on page 22)

Licensing: Click to open a drop-down menu enabling selection of the Properties option for displaying

Licensing Information (details of IP Addresses and associated MAC Addresses of the server). The IP

and MAC addresses applicable for the management system are colored blue.

Logout icon ( ): Click to logout.

Help icon ( ): Click to open the context sensitive on-line help.

1.5.4 Main Area

The Main area provides a user-friendly workspace for the currently active management function,

displaying main details of relevant elements and enabling selection of elements for executing various

actions.

Typically a grid view is used to display the relevant information, with a separate line for each relevant

entity.

The appearance and content of the grid view table may be manipulated to supports specific user

preferences. For details refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18.

The contents of the table are refreshed using up-to-date database information on the following

occasions:

Tab is opened for the first time.

A previously-opened tab is selected as the active one.

Automatic periodic table content refresh is supported for the active tab only.

Any sort / un-sort user action.

Any action in the Find panel.

Page size change.

Help About: Opens the About window displaying details about installed management system components. Refer to “The About Window” on page 21.

Help Contents: Opens the WebHelp contents window.

Menu Option

AlvariSTAR User Manual 11

Page 23: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

1.5.5 Details Panel

Certain management functions include a Details panel, located below the main area. The Details panels

provides additional details for one or (in certain management functions) several entries selected in the

main area.

To minimize the Details panel (and increase the size of the main area), click on the down-pointing red

arrow located on the upper left corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’ original size, click on the

up-pointing red arrow that is now located at the bottom of the screen.

1.5.6 Find Panel

The Find panel enables filtering the contents displayed in the Main Area according to a set of conditions.

The typical Find panel comprises some or all of the following search/filter options:

Simple Search

Saved Filters

Advanced Filtering

Pre-Defined Filters

The contents displayed in the Main Area will match all the criteria defined by any of these search/filter

options (AND operation among all applicable search/filter options).

To minimize the Find panel (and increase the size of the main area), click on the left-pointing red arrow

located on the upper right corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’ original size, click on the

right-pointing red arrow that is now located at the left side of the screen.

Figure 1-3: Find Panel (Discovery Manager)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 12

Page 24: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

1.5.6.1 Simple Search

The Simple Search option enables searching for entities that contain a specified text string (case

in-sensitive) in relevant column(s).

For example, in the Equipment manager type the string “ab” in the Search text box and click on the Find

icon ( ) to search for all devices that include the string “ab” in their Name column. Only devices that

meet this criterion (and, if applicable, criteria defined by other filtering options) will be displayed.

Clear the text box to remove the search criterion.

1.5.6.2 Saved Filters

The Saved Filters section enables managing saved filters. A saved filter includes all the filtering criteria in

the Advanced Filters and/or Pre-Defined Filters sections that were defined when it was saved. If both

Advanced Filters and Pre-Defined Filters are used, filtering is based on an AND operation among all

defined filtering criteria.

Use the following icons to manage saved filters:

The Saved Filters sections provides the following options:

1 Define the required filtering criteria in the Advanced Filter and/or Pre-Defined Filter sections.

2 Enter the new filter name in the Type Filter Name field.

3 Click on the Save Filter icon.

1 Enter the filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list of

previously saved filters and selected the required filter.

Icon Description

Delete Filter

Load Filter

Save Filter

Clear Filter

To save a new filter:

To apply a previously saved filter:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 13

Page 25: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

2 Click Apply to apply the selected filter.

To clear the currently applied filter click on the Clear Filter icon.

1 Enter the filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list of

previously saved filters and selected the required filter.

2 Click on the Delete Filter icon to delete the selected filter.

1 Enter the filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list of

previously saved filters and selected the required filter.

2 Edit the definitions in Advanced Filters and/or Pre-Defined Filters.

3 Click on the Save Filter icon.

1 Enter the existing filter name in the Type Filter Name field, or click on the Load Filter icon to open a list

of previously saved filters and selected the required filter.

2 Edit the definitions in Advanced Filters and/or Pre-Defined Filters.

3 Enter the new filter name in the Type Filter Name field.

4 Click on the Save Filter icon.

1.5.6.3 Advanced Filtering

The Advanced Filtering option enables definition of filters based on multiple criteria.

1 Click on Add Criteria action link.

To clear an applied filter:

To delete a previously saved filter:

To edit a previously saved filter:

To create a new saved filter based on an existing saved filter:

To define a new criterion:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 14

Page 26: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

2 A list with possible options (tab-specific) is opened, allowing selection of a criterion. Select the

required criterion to open the configuration dialog for the new criterion. The configuration dialog

section includes the Criterion’s name field, Operator selection field and value field(s). You may change

the selected criterion by clicking on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the Criterion’s name

and selecting a different one.

3 Select the required Operator. Available Operators depend on the selected criterion (see below details

on Operator types).

4 According to the selected Operator, define the relevant value(s.)

5 To add an additional criterion, click on Add Criterion and repeat step 2 - 4 above.

6 To remove a criterion, click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the criterion’s name and

select the remove option.

7 To apply the selected criteria, click on Apply.

If multiple criteria are defined, filtering will be based on an AND operation among the different criteria

(including selected criteria in the Pre-Defined Filters described below, if applicable).

Available Operators depend on selected criterion. Possible Operators are:

Equal: A single value should be defined, either as a text string (case in-sensitive) or from a list of fixed

values. Filtered list will include only entities where the information in the relevant column matches

exactly the configured value.

In: Multiple values can be defined, either as a free text strings (case in-sensitive) or from a list of fixed

values. Use the >> and << buttons to ad/remove values to/from the list. Filtered list will include only

entities where the information in the relevant column matches exactly any of the configured value.

Like: Allows the use of a wildcard character (*) with a text string (case in-sensitive). For example, for

the Name criterion, define the string “*ab*” to search for all entities that include the string ab

anywhere in their Name. Define the string “ab*” to search for all entities that include the string ab at

the beginning of their Name.

Between: Applicable for criteria such as IP address or date, allowing to define a range of values (from

- to). For dates, specify start date and end date. You can either enter the dates in the relevant text

boxes or click on the down arrow sign to open the calendar for date selection. End date must be

higher than start date. Filtered list will include only entities where the information in the relevant

column is in the defined range.

Is Empty: Filtered list will include only entities where the information in the relevant column is null.

Applicable for the Name and Location columns in the Equipment manager, enabling identification of

devices without a configured name or without an assigned location.

To modify the configuration of an advanced filter:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 15

Page 27: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe NMS Client ScreenChapter 1 - Introduction The NMS Client Screen

1 To change a criterion, click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the criterion’s name and

select a different criterion from the list. Select Operator and relevant value(s).

2 To add a criterion, click on Add Criteria, select required criterion, Operator and relevant value(s).

3 To remove a criterion, click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the criterion’s name and

select the remove option.

4 After completing all changes, click Apply.

1.5.6.4 Pre-Defined Filters

Pre-defined Filters are tab-specific and include one or several groups of filtering criteria. The relevant

filtering criterion is presented as the filtering group’s header.

Each group may include several filtering options, with a selection checkbox next to each option.

In some cases all possible options are displayed, regardless of the current contents of the Main Area. In

some other cases only valid options (according to the current contents of the Main Area) are displayed.

For example, in the Equipment tab the list of Alarm State options includes only valid options according

to the current contents of the Equipment list (if there is no device whose Alarm State is Critical, the

Critical option will not be included in the options list). Where applicable, the filtering option will be

accompanied by the number of entities that meet the specific filtering option. According to the

properties of the specific criterion, you may select either only one or several options.

You may use the toggling down/up arrow to the right of the group’s name header to hide/expose the

entire list of options.

When several options in the same group are selected (if multiple selection is supported for the specific

group), filtering will be based on an OR operation among the selected options.

When options in two or more groups are selected, filtering will be based on an AND operation among

the selected groups.

Filtering is applied on the fly, immediately upon selection of option(s).

1.5.7 Actions Panel

The Actions panel contains a list of possible actions that may be carried on entities selected in the main

area.

For certain managers, availability of certain actions depend on the installed device driver(s).

Some actions may be non-relevant and indicated as such under certain conditions, such as:

The action is not applicable for the selected entity type.

The action is not applicable for multiple selected entities.

The action is not applicable multiple selected entities of different types.

The action is not applicable due to current conditions of selected single or multiple entities.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 16

Page 28: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe Home PageChapter 1 - Introduction The Home Page

To minimize the Actions panel (and increase the size of the main area), click on the right-pointing arrow

located on the upper left corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’ original size, click on the

left-pointing arrow that is now located at the right side of the screen.

1.5.8 Management Systems Icons

Located on the lower right corner of the application screen, these icons provide status information on

StarQuality ( ) and StarACS ( ) management applications and enable direct links to these

applications.

The color of the icon indicates the status of the relevant application:

Green: The application’s server is installed and running properly.

Red: The server down or one of its’ components is down.

Grey: The application is not configured (see “Application Configuration” on page 232).

Place the mouse over an icon to view additional status details.

Click on a green colored icon to open the main page of the relevant application.

1.6 The Home Page

By default, when the application is opened the Home page is displayed.

The Home page provides a high level graphical view of the system, such as general inventory details and

network fault status information. It includes six zones for different charts/graphs. For details on selecting

Figure 1-4: The Home Page

AlvariSTAR User Manual 17

Page 29: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionUsing the Grid ViewChapter 1 - Introduction Using the Grid View

the chart/graph to be displayed in each zone and the information provided by each chart/graph refer to

“Homepage” on page 247.

1.7 Using the Grid View

This section includes:

Selecting/De-selecting Entities

Dynamic Columns Selection

Rearranging and Resizing Columns

Sorting

Using the Master Table Control

Page Control Bar

1.7.1 Selecting/De-selecting Entities

The left-most column of each row contains a checkbox, indicating whether the entity is selected or not.

To select a single row, click anywhere in the row. All other rows will be de-selected.

For multiple rows selection/de-selection, including rows in different pages, use the traditional Shift-Click

and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. You may also select/de-selected rows one by one by

clicking on the checkbox.

To select/de-select all rows in the current page, use the master checkbox in the headers row.

When multiple rows are selected, click on a row to de-select all other rows in the same page.

1.7.2 Dynamic Columns Selection

Right-click on a table header to displays a list of all the columns that are available in the table (in many

tables only a sub-set of available columns is selected by default). Select the columns that you wish to

display and de-select the columns that you want to hide.

This columns selection is available also upon clicking on the master table control icon ( ) located on

the right side of the headers row (see more details in Using the Master Table Control below).

1.7.3 Rearranging and Resizing Columns

To rearrange column sequence, click and drag a column header to the new desired position (not

applicable for the checkbox column and, if relevant, to entity status icon column).

INFORMATION

The following section is not applicable for tables in a Device Manager. For details on working with device configuration tables refer to “Working with Configuration Tables” on page 25.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 18

Page 30: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionUsing the Grid ViewChapter 1 - Introduction Using the Grid View

Typically the width of all rows is adjusted automatically to display all relevant information. To resize a

column, position the cursor on the border line between two columns headings. The cursor changes into

a double-headed arrow. Click and drag the cursor to the left or to the right to increase or decrease the

size of a column.

1.7.4 Sorting

By default, table are sorted according to the order of being added to the database of the management

system.

Place the mouse pointer over a column header. A small drop-down list icon will be displayed on the right

side of the header. Click on the drop-down list icon to open the sorting selection list.

Select the Sort Ascending option to sort the table by the selected column in ascending order.

Select the Sort Descending option to sort the table by the selected column in descending order.

Select Clear Sorting to clear all sorting. The table will revert to its default sorting method.

After selecting any of the options above, multi-level custom sorting configuration (see “Using the

Master Table Control” on page 19) will be cleared.

Alternatively, click on any of the column headings to sort the table by the selected column. Click again

on a column heading to toggle between ascending and descending sorting order.

An up/down arrow on the right side of relevant header’s names will indicate the columns used for

sorting and the sorting method being used.

1.7.5 Using the Master Table Control

Click on the master table control icon ( ) located on the right side of the headers row to open the

drop-down menu offering the following options:

Figure 1-5: Sorting Selection List

AlvariSTAR User Manual 19

Page 31: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionUsing the Grid ViewChapter 1 - Introduction Using the Grid View

Columns Selection Check-boxes: A list of all available columns allowing to select/de-select columns

(identical to the functionality available for right-click on any header).

Horizontal Scroll Checkbox: Horizontal scrolling is enabled (selected) by default. De-select to disable

horizontal scrolling and hide the horizontal scroll bar. The width of all currently selected columns will

be adjusted to fit in the available space.

Pack All Columns: Resizes all columns to the minimum width that still fits the content of each column.

Pack Selected Column: Resizes the currently selected column to its minimum width that still fits all its

content.

Custom Sort: Opens the Sort Configuration window, enabling to configure multi-level sorting (sort by

... than sort by .... than sort by, up to 3 sorting levels):

1 Click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the Sort By selection box to open a list

containing all possible column names, and select the column to be used for first level soaarting.

Figure 1-6: Master Table Control Options (MS Manager)

Figure 1-7: Sort Configuration Window

AlvariSTAR User Manual 20

Page 32: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionThe About WindowChapter 1 - Introduction The About Window

2 Click on the drop-down menu icon on the right side of the Sort Order selection box to open a list

enabling selection between sorting methods (Ascending, Descending, Unsorted) and select the

required first level sorting method.

3 For second level sorting, click on the Add Level button. Sort By and Sort Order for second level

sorting will be displayed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for second level sorting.

4 For third level sorting, click on the Add Level button. Sort By and Sort Order for third level sorting

will be displayed. Repeat steps 1 and 2 above for third level sorting.

5 To remove the last configured sorting level (excluding first level sorting), click on the Remove Level

button.

6 Click OK to apply the sorting configuration and close the window.

7 An up/down arrow on the right side of relevant headers’ names will indicate the columns used for

sorting and the sorting method being used.

1.7.6 Page Control Bar

The Page Control Bar is displayed for certain tabs at the bottom of the main area (below the table).

When the number of rows exceeds the number defined in the Page Size box, the results are divided into

several pages. Click on the drop-down list icon on the right side of the Page Size box to see view all

possible options and select a different page size if required.

The total numbers of items (rows) and pages are indicated on the right side of the Page Control Bar. Use

the following controls on the left side of the Page Control Bar to browse between the various pages, or

select directly the required page number in the displayed list of pages:

1.8 The About Window

The About window displays a list of all products installed and their software version.

To open the About window, select Help > About in the Main Menu.

Figure 1-8: Page Control Bar

Icon Description

First/Previous - Cycles back to the first or previous page.

Next/Last - Cycles forward to the next or last page.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 21

Page 33: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionChanging the PasswordChapter 1 - Introduction Changing the Password

The version numbers of the management system and the installed product line device driver(s) are in the

format a.b.c.d, where a.b increases for major releases, c increases for minor releases and d is an internal

control number.

1.9 Changing the Password

To change your password, select the Change Password option in the <User Name> drop-down menu

(see “Status & Info” on page 11).

1 Enter the new password (5-32 characters)

2 Confirm the new password.

3 Click Finish to save the new password.

Figure 1-9: About Window

Figure 1-10: Reset Password Window

To change the password:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 22

Page 34: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionCommon Control Buttons/IconsChapter 1 - Introduction Common Control Buttons/Icons

Refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290 for details on passwords policy including password

constraints.

1.10 Common Control Buttons/Icons

A control button/icon causes an immediate action. To activate a control button/icon, click on it. Certain

control buttons/icons only appear in selected windows/dialog boxes. Others are common to most

windows.

1.11 Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)

This section includes:

Accessing the Device Manager

The Device Manager Components

Common Control Buttons

Working with Configuration Tables

1.11.1 Accessing the Device Manager

The Device Manager enables managing a single device and its components (if applicable).

Button/Icon Description

Apply Applies changes made in the window. Clicking the Apply button maintains the window opened for the following transaction or response delivery.

OK Applies changes made in the window and closes the window.

Cancel Closes the active window without taking any further action. Any modifications made prior to clicking Cancel are ignored.

Refresh Refreshes the window and displays the most updated information from the database of the management system.

Save Saves changes made in the dialog box.

Help

Displays the online context sensitive help window.

Open Selector

The Open Selector button appears whenever the command’s completion may need an additional selection step. Clicking this button displays another window that lets you select an entry for an adjacent field.

Eraser

Clears adjacent field. It appears next to a field with an Open Selector button at the other end.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 23

Page 35: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionSingle Device Configuration (Device Manager)Chapter 1 - Introduction Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)

The Device Manager for a selected device can be opened from any of the following managers:

Equipment

Active Events

Event History

In the Manager, select the relevant entity and click on the Configure button. The BTS <BTS_Number>

tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Device Manager for the selected entity opens, displaying the

main page for the device manager.

1.11.2 The Device Manager Components

The Device Manager window comprises the following components:

To open the Device Manager for a selected device:

Figure 1-11: The Device Manager Components

Component Description

Page Name The name of the current page.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 24

Page 36: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionSingle Device Configuration (Device Manager)Chapter 1 - Introduction Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)

1.11.3 Common Control Buttons

The following icons and buttons are common to most configuration/information pages.

1.11.4 Working with Configuration Tables

In some pages, tables are used for displaying information and for configuring and managing multiple

entities of the same type.

Grayed-out cells are read-only.

To rearrange column sequence, click and drag a column header to the new desired position.

Typically the width of all rows is adjusted automatically to display all relevant information. To resize a

column, position the cursor on the border line between two columns headings. The cursor changes into

Navigation Pane Displays all configuration/information pages and enables opening a selected page by clicking on it. Use the Hide/View icons on the left side of each option to hide/view sub-options.

Tab Selection Enables selection among tabs in pages with two or more tabs.

Selected Page The selected page. Enables viewing/managing the applicable parameters

Status Indicates the status of the current operation (Applying/Refreshing/Done).

Progress Bar Indicates an “in progress” operation.

Icon/Button Description

Help Opens the Help Navigator and Help Topic Window for the page.

Refresh from Device Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the device

Updates the information displayed in the page according to current values acquired from the database of the management system

Implements the modifications to the configuration of the device. Exiting the Device Manager or switching to another page without applying discards the changes.

This button is not available in information pages that display read-only details and do not include any configurable parameters.

To re-arrange and/or re-size columns:

Component Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 25

Page 37: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 1 - IntroductionSingle Device Configuration (Device Manager)Chapter 1 - Introduction Single Device Configuration (Device Manager)

a double-headed arrow. Click and drag the cursor to the left or to the right to increase or decrease the

size of a column.

Click on the master table control icon ( ) located on the right side of the headers row to open the

drop-down menu offering the following options:

Columns Selection Check-boxes: A list of all available columns allowing to select/de-select columns.

Horizontal Scroll Checkbox: Horizontal scrolling is enabled (selected) by default. De-select to disable

horizontal scrolling and hide the horizontal scroll bar. The width of all currently selected columns will

be adjusted to fit in the available space.

Pack All Columns: When the table exceeds the width of the available work area, this option attempts

to fit it into the available space by reducing the columns’ widths.

Pack Selected Column: Resizes the currently selected column to its minimum width that still fits all its

content.

Double-click on the applicable cell: In a text-cell, edit the content. In some cells a drop-down menu will

open, enabling selection of the required option. Click on any other cell to apply the change to the

selected cell. At this stage the change is applied only to the display, and the displayed parameters of the

modified entry are colored blue. The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply

button.

Click on the Add button. A new row will be added. Some parameters may be set to their default values,

allowing (if applicable) modification to other values. Configure the required parameters. At this stage

the change is applied only to the display, and the displayed parameters of the new entry are colored

green. The change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button.

Select the entities you want to delete and click on the Delete button. At this stage the change is applied

only to the display, and the displayed parameters of the entries to be deleted are colored red. The

change is applied to the device only after clicking on the Apply button.

To use the Master Table Control:

To modify the configuration of an existing entity:

To add a new entity (if applicable):

To delete one or several entities (if applicable):

AlvariSTAR User Manual 26

Page 38: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment Manager

In This Chapter:

“Introduction to the Equipment Manager” on page 28

“Switching between Grid and Map Views” on page 29

“Equipment List Grid View” on page 29

“Map View” on page 31

“Equipment Details” on page 36

“Equipment Actions Panel” on page 43

“Find Equipment Panel” on page 46

“Network Element Discovery” on page 47

“The Network Element Editor” on page 50

“The Common attributes Editor” on page 54

“Real-Time Performance Viewer” on page 55

“Configuration History Request and Report” on page 59

“The Equipment Selector Window” on page 61

Page 39: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerIntroduction to the Equipment ManagerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Introduction to the Equipment Manager

2.1 Introduction to the Equipment Manager

The Equipment manager provides a view of all devices that can be managed by the specific user, with

some general information on managed devices and access to various functions that enable

comprehensive management of equipment in the network.

Select the Equipment tab header in the tabs ribbon. The Equipment manager is displayed. The default

view in the Main Area is grid view of the Equipment List.

INFORMATIONUsers with Administrators privileges can manage all network elements in all locations. The network elements that can be managed by other users may be limited according to the assigned domains. For details refer to “User Domain Manager” on page 293.

To open the Equipment Manager:

Figure 2-1: Equipment List View

INFORMATION The Equipment tab header may include a red oval with the number of devices with open critical summarized alarm (or critical highest severity alarm if summarized alarm is not supported). If there are no devices with critical alarms the red oval will not be displayed. The list of relevant equipment for this indication includes all the devices that can be managed by the specific user and is not affected by any settings in the Find panel.

INFORMATION Applications running on different NMS clients bound to the same server are notified of the changes made by other clients in the equipment list. The equipment list will be automatically updated whenever another client on the network modifies (adds, deletes or edits) equipment data that affects the contents of the database.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 28

Page 40: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerSwitching between Grid and Map ViewsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Switching between Grid and Map Views

2.2 Switching between Grid and Map Views

The Grid ( ) and Map ( ) icons on the right top corner of the main area enable selecting the

information view mode.

The default view is grid view. Map view is available only for users with View Map privileges that are

assigned the Map Users User Profile.

2.3 Equipment List Grid View

The Equipment List grid view comprises a table that by default includes all the equipment objects that

exist in the database of the management system that can be managed by the specific user. This includes

all relevant devices that were actually discovered by the management system. The default sorting is

according to discovery time.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the information displayed for each device includes:

INFORMATIONBy default the application is supplied with a license for two Map Users (the Map Users User Profile cannot be assigned to more than two users). If needed, contact the supplier for details on increasing the number of licensed Map Users.

Parameter Description

Equipment Icon An equipment icon whose color is according to summarized alarm severity or highest alarm severity (if summarized alarm is not supported) of the specific device:

Critical: Red

Major: Orange

Minor: Yellow

Warning: Blue

Indeterminate: Purple

Other: Grey

Cleared: Green

The Icon column can be used for sorting the table by alarm severity. However, unlike other columns, has a fixed width and it cannot be moved or deleted.

Name The device’s Name as configured in the device.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 29

Page 41: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment List Grid ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment List Grid View

Type The device’s type.

SW Version The currently running SW version. Applicable only for devices that are Up or that were reached previously.

Release Number The formal release number of the running SW version.

IP Address The IP address of the device.

Location The location of the device as defined in the database of the management system, either by the system during discovery (see “The Locations Manager” on page 95 and “Discovery Task” on page 219) or manually using either the Network Element Editor (see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50) or the Common Attributes Editor for multiple devices (see “The Common attributes Editor” on page 54).

Management Status The management status of the device:

Managed - The equipment is answering to keep-alive/polling and synchronization.

Unreachable - A device that the management system is aware of (exists in the database) but cannot be reached currently.

Unknown - This is typically a temporary status for a device that its current status is unknown. After a short time its status should change to one of the other options.

Unlicensed - If the number of devices of a certain type in the database has reached the number of licenses for managing the specific device type, additional devices of this type added to the database will be presented as unlicensed. These devices cannot be managed by the system (unless the Management Status of other devices is changed to Unmanaged). For more details about adding new licenses refer to “Licenses Manager” on page 285.

Unmanageable - Equipment is reachable but cannot be managed from various reasons: wrong SW version, synch errors, no route, etc.

Unmanaged - Operator does not want to manage an equipment, although it is discovered. For details see the Manage/Un-manage option in “Administration” on page 44.

Operational Status This column indicates the device’s operational status:

Disabled - The Management State is other than Managed, or the Management State is Managed and the device is totally inoperable and unable to provide service to the user(s).

Enabled - The Management State is Managed and the device is partially or fully operable and available for use.

BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) configured in the device.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 30

Page 42: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View

2.4 Map View

This section includes:

Switching to Map View

Map View Controls

Map Overlay

Selecting/De-selecting Devices in Map View

Viewing Neighbors

Viewing MSs

Key Performance Indicators

2.4.1 Switching to Map View

In the Equipment list, select one or several devices and click on the Map icon. The Map view will be

displayed with the selected devices’ icons. Zoom and center point of the displayed map shall be

automatically adjusted for optimal display of all selected devices (provide coordinates are available for

the selected devices).

2.4.2 Map View Controls

The standard map view controls are located on the top left corner of the map:

Figure 2-2: Map View

AlvariSTAR User Manual 31

Page 43: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View

2.4.3 Map Overlay

Devices with known coordinates are presented on the map by suitable icons. Icon’s color shall represent

summarized alarm severity (or highest alarm severity) of the specific device, using the standard set of

colors:

Critical: Red

Major: Orange

Minor: Yellow

Warning: Blue

Indeterminate: Purple

Other: Grey

Cleared: Green

For co-located (or nearly-located) devices, the number of devices is displayed on the icon, with icon color

according the highest alarm severity. You can click on the icon to open separate icons for the

co-located/nearly-located devices.

Table 2-1: Map View Controls

Control Description

Pan Click once to pan the map in the selected direction. To pan continuously, click and hold in the required direction. Alternatively, click and hold anywhere in the map area and drag in the required direction.

Zoom In (-)/Zoom Out (+) Click once to zoom in/zoom out. You can also place the mouse over the Zoom In/Zoom Out controls to open the zoom slider.

View Type selection Place the mouse over the selected view type to open the view type selection window. The available views are:

Road

Bird’s eye (enabling control of showing/hiding labels and of angled views)

Automatic (best view type according to zoom in/out status)

The default is Bird’s eye with show labels enabled and show angled view disabled.

Find Address Enables viewing a specific address on the map. Click to open the address definition window. Specify Address, City and Country and click OK to initiate a Bing task for geolocating the address and showing it as the center point of the map. If the geolocation finding process returned several possible results, a list with all the results (address and coordintates) will be displayed, enabling selection of the preferred one.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 32

Page 44: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View

Place the mouse pointer over a BTS icon to open an information bubble with BTS details (ID, Name, NE

Type, IP Address and Alarm Status).

For each device (excluding the Mini-Centralized ASN-GW), the associated BSs (sectors) are presented as

equilateral triangles pointing outward of the BTS icon, at the approximate sector’s heading and width as

defined in the device. In the current release, the sector’s icon size represents a fixed radio range: 500

meters for 4Motion/COMPACT, 2 Km for Extreme. BS’s sector color is according to the current value of

selected Key Performance Indicator (KPI) For more details refer to Key Performance Indicators below.

Place the mouse pointer over a sector to open an information bubble with BS details (KPI, KPI Value, KPI

Scale, BS ID and Sector Name including main sector association details).

2.4.4 Selecting/De-selecting Devices in Map View

A selected device is indicated by two blue rings circling the icon. By default, all devices selected before

switching to map view are displayed as selected on the map.

To select a single device, click on its icon. All other devices will be de-selected.

To select multiple de-selected devices, click on each device’s icon with the Ctrl key pressed.

To de-select a selected device, click on the device’s icon with the Ctrl key pressed.

2.4.5 Viewing Neighbors

For a single selected device, select the Radio tab in the Details panel (see “Equipment Details Radio Tab”

on page 40) and click on the Show Neighbors Action for the relevant sector (applicable only for

4Motion/COMPACT devices) to visualize the sectors (BSs) associated as neighbors to the selected sector

(B)S. If there are any neighbor(s) defined for the sector, the system zooms and moves the map to an

appropriate resolution and location so that each involved sector is clearly visible, and displays a

highlighting animation of the sector together with its neighbors for several seconds by drawing the

contour of the involved sectors.

2.4.6 Viewing MSs

For a single selected device, select the Radio tab in the Details panel (see “Equipment Details Radio Tab”

on page 40) and select the Show MSs check-box(es) to display the MSs served by the relevant sector(s).

The default is de-selected (MSs not shown). You may also display a selected MS by selecting the Show

on MAP action in the MS Manager (see “MS Actions Panel” on page 148). Only “connected” MSs are

displayed: “Connected” 4Motion/COMPACT CPEs include all CPEs available in the database of

StarQuality that had at least one collection in the last 24 hours (including CPEs not available in the

database of StarACS). “Connected” Extreme CPEs include all CPEs available in the database of

AlvariSTAR (including CPEs not available in the database of StarACS). Icons for MSs with a known

geolocation served by the sector are displayed in their defined geolocations (for details on geolocating

MSs refer to “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240. For MSs without a known geolocation, an MS icon

is displayed at the center of the serving sector’s area. A single icon is shown for two or more MSs

without a known geolocation or in the same geolocation, with the number of MSs indicated on the

icon.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 33

Page 45: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View

For a single MS, place the mouse pointer over the MS icon to open a bubble with its details (Serial

Number, MAC Address, BS ID, SW Version).

For an icon indicating two or more MSs, click on the icon to view MS(s) details:

If the number indicating the quantity of MSs is higher than 10, a bubble with MSs Information table

opens displaying main details for each MSs. By default the table is sorted by ascending order of MSs

Serial Number.

If the number is 10 or lower, the MSs display is “expanded” with an icon for each MS. Place the

mouse pointer over a MS icon to open a bubble with its details.

2.4.7 Key Performance Indicators

BS’s sector color is according to its current Key Performance Indicator (KPI) value. Refer to “Sector’s Color

based on KPI” on page 239 for details on selecting the KPI to be used for each device family.

This section includes:

4Motion/COMPACT Key Performance Indicators

Extreme Key Performance Indicators

2.4.7.1 4Motion/COMPACT Key Performance Indicators

KPIs for 4Motion/COMPACT devices are based on information recorded in StarQuality for the last

15-minutes period for which there is available data regarding the relevant BS.

Available KPIs are:

DL Air Link Utilization, Data Zone

SINR Distribution Downlink - SINR (SINR distribution Downlink less than 5dB)

DL Throughput Total

Details on representative colors are shown below:

Table 2-2: 4Motion/COMPACT KPIs and Representative Colors

KPI Units Value Color

SINR Distribution Downlink - SINR % 0-10 Green

10-20 Yellow

20-30 Orange

30-40 Red

40-50 Purple

50 and above Blue

AlvariSTAR User Manual 34

Page 46: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerMap ViewChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Map View

BS sectors are presented as a hollow triangle (Black line, no fill) in the following cases:

1 StarQuality is not included in the specific installation or is not running properly.

2 StarQuality does not have data regarding the specific BS in the last 15-minutes period.

2.4.7.2 Extreme Key Performance Indicators

KPIs for Extreme devices are based on real-time counters taken by the management system every 5

minutes from each device using SNMP. Details on KPIs and their representative colors are shown below.

DL Air Link Utilization, Data Zone % 0-30 Green

30-50 Yellow

50-70 Orange

70-80 Red

80-90 Purple

90-100 Blue

DL Throughput Total bps Above 8,000,000 Green

3,000,001-8,000,000 Yellow

2,000,001-3,000,000 Orange

1,000,001-2,000,000 Red

500,000-1,000,000 Purple

0-500,000 Blue

Table 2-3: Extreme KPI Details

KPI Description

UL NACK Uplink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:

UL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames= number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

Table 2-2: 4Motion/COMPACT KPIs and Representative Colors

KPI Units Value Color

AlvariSTAR User Manual 35

Page 47: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

BS sectors are presented as a hollow triangle (black line, no fill) if the KPI value, or one of the KPI values

for max(UL, DL NACK), is not available for the last 5 minutes interval.

2.5 Equipment Details

The read-only information available in the Equipment Details section is retrieved from the management

system’s database, regardless of current Management Status and Operational State of selected device(s).

The Equipment Details section includes the following tabs:

Equipment Details Basic Tab

Equipment Details Operational Tab

DL NACK Downlink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:

DL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames= number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

NACK DL UL Ratios The maximum value of UL NACK and DL NACK (described above).

Table 2-4: Extreme KPI Representative Colors

KPI Units Value Color

UL NACK % 0-2.9999 Green

3-9.9999 Yellow

10 and above Red

DL NACK % 0-2.9999 Green

3-9.9999 Yellow

10 and above Red

NACK DL UL Ratios % 0-2.9999 Green

3-9.9999 Yellow

10 and above Red

Table 2-3: Extreme KPI Details

KPI Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 36

Page 48: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

Equipment Details Radio Tab

Equipment Details Tasks Tab

2.5.1 Equipment Details Basic Tab

The contents of the Basic tab for a single selected device depend on the selected device type. The

following details are available:

BTS Name

BTS Number

BTS Type

IP Address

Contact Person (as defined in the database of the management system, either automatically during

discovery (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219) or manually

using either the Network Element Editor for a single device (see “The Network Element Editor” on

page 50) or the Common Attributes Editor for multiple devices (see “The Common attributes Editor”

on page 54).

Location (as defined in the database of the management system, either automatically during

discovery (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219) or manually

using either the Network Element Editor for a single device (see “The Network Element Editor” on

page 50) or the Common Attributes Editor for multiple devices (see “The Common attributes Editor”

on page 54)

GPS Type

Management Connectivity Mode (Applicable for COMPACT BTS and 4Motion devices excluding

Micro BTS)

Configured ASN Topology (Applicable for Extreme BTS and 4Motion Macro BTS/Macro BTS ODU)

Figure 2-3: Equipment Details Basic Tab (Compact Device)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 37

Page 49: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

Number of registered MSs

In addition, relevant HW properties (such as Serial Number, HW revision, types/number of different

components) and relevant SW versions/files names are also displayed. The exact contents depend on

the type of the selected device.

The contents of the Basic tab for multiple selected devices belonging to the same products family

depend on the selected device(s) type(s).

The following details are available for multiple selected devices belonging to the same products family:

BTS Type: A list of number of devices per device type.

SW Version: A list of number of devices per running SW version (COMPACT and Extreme.

Additional details available only for 4Motion devices (if applicable for any of the selected devices):

» ASN Topologies: A list of number of devices per ASN Topology.

» Running NPU SW Version: A list of number of devices per running NPU SW Version

» AU Types: A list of number of AUs per AU type.

» Running AU SW Version: A list of number of AUs per running AU SW version.

If multiple devices belonging to different products families are selected, the following details for the

selected devices are displayed per products family:

BTS Type: A list of number of devices per device type.

SW Version: A list of number of devices per running SW version.

2.5.2 Equipment Details Operational Tab

For a single selected device, the following details are displayed:

Figure 2-4: Equipment Details Basic Tab (Compact Devices)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 38

Page 50: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

Management Status: The current Management Status of the device.

Operational State: The current Operational State of the device.

Active Events table: A table displaying the currently active events of the selected device. For more

details refer to “Active Events Main Area” on page 63.

For multiple selected devices, the following details are displayed:

Management Status: Number of devices per Management Status value.

Operational State: Number of devices per Operational State value.

Alarms per Severity: Number of open alarms per severity.

BTSs per Highest Alarm: Number of devices per highest alarm (summarized alarm value if available).

Age of oldest per Severity: Age of oldest alarm per severity (excluding "Cleared").

No. of "Not Installed": Number of currently open “Not Installed” alarms (applicable only for 4Motion

Macro BTS/Macro BTS ODU).

No. of "Configuration Mismatch": Number of currently open “Configuration Mismatch” alarms

(applicable only for 4Motion devices).

Figure 2-5: Equipment Details Operational Tab (A Single Device)

Figure 2-6: Equipment Details Operational Tab (Multiple Devices)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 39

Page 51: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

2.5.3 Equipment Details Radio Tab

The contents of the Radio tab for a single selected device depend on the selected device type. The

following details are available:

Radio Operation Mode (applicable only for Extreme BTS)

BTS Topology Type (applicable only for COMPACT BTS)

Sectors details table, providing the following details for each configured sector:

» Sector Name (default column to sort by, ascending order)

» Sector Number

» Sector Heading (applicable only for COMPACT and 4Motion BTSs)

» Sector Location (applicable only for Extreme BTS)

» BS ID (Operator ID - Cell ID - Logical Sector ID, applicable only for Extreme BTS)

» BS ID LSB (applicable only for COMPACT and 4Motion BTSs)

» Center Frequency

» Bandwidth

» Maximum Tx Power

» Show MSs: Select to show in Map view the MSs served by the sector. For more details refer to

“Viewing MSs” on page 33. This option is supported only if Map Users user profile is assigned to

the user and coordinates are available for the serving BTS.

» Action: Applicable only for device types that support definition of neighbors (COMPACT and

4Motion BTSs). Click on the Show Neighbors link to temporarily display in Map view the sector

with its defined neighbors. For more details refer to “Viewing Neighbors” on page 33. This

Figure 2-7: Equipment Details Radio Tab (Single Extreme Device)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 40

Page 52: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

option is supported only if Map Users user profile is assigned to the user and coordinates are

available for the BTS.

For Mini-Centralized ASN-GWs the Radio tab is not applicable (empty).

For multiple selected devices the Radio tab is not applicable (empty).

2.5.4 Equipment Details Tasks Tab

The Tasks tab presents the task instances relevant to the selected device(s), excluding System-level tasks

(e.g. Network Scan).

Relevant task types are listed on the left side of the graphical view, grouped by task category (all

instances of a specific category, e.g. Configuration Backup or SW Upgrade, are presented in a single

row, regardless of device types)

A slide selector enables selecting one of the following values for the displayed time window size:

1 Day

2 Days (default)

5 Days

7 Days

Horizontal scroll mechanism using left & right arrows enables shifting the displayed information to

desired dates. By default the center of the window is the current date and time.

Task instances are colored as follows:

A single successful instance: Green

A single partially successful instance (e.g. SW Upgrade task-instance for multiple devices, in which the

task ended successfully for some devices and failed for other devices: Yellow

Figure 2-8: Equipment Details Tasks Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 41

Page 53: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment DetailsChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Details

A single failed instance: Red

Multiple instances with the same result: The same color as for a single instance.

Multiple instances with different results: Striped with Green, Yellow and Red.

A future (scheduled) instances - Blue

A special icon indicates overlapping task instance (due to currently-used zoom level).

A single-task instance information shall be presented in a bubble upon mouse hovering over the specific

instance. This information shall include:

Task Category (type)

Task Name

Date & time

Result

AlvariSTAR User Manual 42

Page 54: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment Actions PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Actions Panel

2.6 Equipment Actions Panel

The Equipment Actions panel includes the following sections:

Configuration

Administration

View

Links

2.6.1 Configuration

The Configuration section includes the following options:

Option Action

New Initiates a discovery process for a new network element. Click to open the Network Element Discovery window to define the necessary parameters and initiate a discovery process for the defined device. For more details, see “Network Element Discovery” on page 47.

NOTE: The New option is always available, without the need to select any existing entry.

Configure Opens a BTS configuration manager for the selected device, enabling full configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>. Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is Disabled.

Multiple Configuration Initiates a template-based multiple configuration process. Applicable only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Opens the Template Selector window (refer to “The Template Selector Window” on page 88), allowing selection of the desired template and initiation of the Multiple Configuration task (refer to “Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225).

Edit Connectivity for a single selected device, opens the Network Element Editor for the selected device, enabling to edit NMS References (Location and Contact), SNMP parameters and coordinates details (if GPS/SNTP is not used by the device). For details see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50.

For multiple selected devices, opens the Common Attributes Editor enabling to edit the Location and Contact parameters for the selected devices. For details see “The Common attributes Editor” on page 54.

Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the selected device in a separate window. Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is other than Enabled.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 43

Page 55: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment Actions PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Actions Panel

2.6.2 Administration

The Administration section includes the following options:

Run CLI Scripts Available only if a 4Motion device driver is installed. Applicable for all 4Motion devices excluding Micro BTS. Applicable only if all selected devices are of the same type. Opens a CLI task (Refer to the CLI Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual), enabling execution of a CLI script file on target device(s).

Delete Deletes the selected equipment object(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation. You can always rediscover deleted equipment.

Option Action

Backup Available only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Not available if the Operational State of any of the selected devices is Disabled. Opens a Configuration Backup Task for the selected device(s), where you can add additional devices to the task. Refer to the Configuration Backup Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Restore Available only for a single selected device, provided its Operation Status is Enabled. Opens a Restore Configuration task enabling to load a selected configuration file to the target device. For more details refer to the Restore Configuration Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Collect Performance Data Available only if the installed device driver(s) include at least one device driver for a product family that support collection of file-based performance data (4Motion and COMPACT). Applicable only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Opens the Performance Collection task for the selected devices. For more details refer to the Performance Collection Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

SW Upgrade Applicable only if all selected devices belong to the same products family. Opens the SW Upgrade task for the selected devices. For more details refer to the SW Upgrade Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Export Exports the general information of the selected device(s) to an external Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected equipment are exported, including columns that are currently hidden. Opens the Exports dialog box in which you can browse to the desired location, enter a file name, and click Export. The information for the selected device(s) is exported.

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 44

Page 56: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerEquipment Actions PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Equipment Actions Panel

2.6.3 View

The View section includes the following options:

2.6.4 Links

The Links section includes the following option:

Manage/Un-manage Available only for a single selected device.

For a device whose Management Status is Unmanaged - attempts to revert a manually unmanaged device to its normal management status. A temporary Unknown status will be indicated, followed by actual status.

For a device whose Management Status is Managed - manually changes the Management Status to Unmanaged. This may be used as a temporary solution for managing Unlicensed devices.

Option Action

Configuration History Available only for a single selected device, provided it belongs to a products family that support this feature (4Motion and COMPACT). Opens the Configuration History Request window, allowing to define time interval and filtering options for the Configuration History Report. For details refer to “Configuration History Request and Report” on page 59.

RT Performance Opens a the Real-Time Performance Monitoring Viewer for the selected device, enabling to view real-time performance of selected counters. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number> RT. Not available if two or more devices are selected or if the Operational State of the selected device is Disabled. For more details refer to “Real-Time Performance Viewer” on page 55.

Open Location Available only for a single selected device, provided it has an assigned location. Opens the logical map for the specific location. For details refer to “The Logical Location Map” on page 100.

Option Action

Performance Applicable only for installations in which StarQuality is defined and running. Available only for a single selected device. Opens a cut-through in a separate window to the StarQuality application in the specific BTS context.

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 45

Page 57: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerFind Equipment PanelChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Find Equipment Panel

2.7 Find Equipment Panel

This section includes:

Regular Search/Filter View

The Hierarchy View

2.7.1 Regular Search/Filter View

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is performed on the Name column.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Type: Available options include only equipment types that are actually available in the database. Each

Type will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database. Multiple

selection of different Types is supported.

Alarm State: Available options include all Alarm States that are actually available for filtering (for

example, if none of the devices is in Critical Alarm State, Critical will not be included). Each Alarm

State is accompanied by the current total number of instances of this state in the database. Multiple

selection of different Alarm States is supported.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Name

Running Software Version

Release Number

IP Address

Location

Management Status

Operational State

Note that the “Is Empty” operator for Name and Location enables identification of devices without a

configured name or without an assigned location.

2.7.2 The Hierarchy View

The Equipment tab allows also filtering based on equipment locations using the location-based hierarchy

view, as defined in the Location Manager.

The Equipment Manager in the Local CRAFT Utility enables managing a single BTS. To manage a new device, add it to the equipment list using the New option and change the Management Status of all other devices to Un-managed.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 46

Page 58: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerNetwork Element DiscoveryChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Network Element Discovery

To switch to location-based hierarchy view, click on the Hierarchy View icon ( ) on the top of the

panel. To switch back to the regular Search/Filter view, click on the regular Search/Filter View icon ( ).

The hierarchy view displays the location-based hierarchy of the network.

Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant

sub-locations.

You can use the free-text Find text box together with the Next and Previous buttons to find locations

that include the search string anywhere in their name.

Use the check-boxes to select required locations/sub-locations. Only devices whose location matches any

of the selected locations will be displayed in the Main Area.

By default all devices without a defined location are also displayed. De-select the Show Unallocated

check-box to remove these devices from the displayed list.

2.8 Network Element Discovery

To initiate discovery of a single device click on the New option in the Actions panel to open the Network

Element Discovery window:

Figure 2-9: Equipment Find Panel, Hierarchy View

AlvariSTAR User Manual 47

Page 59: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerNetwork Element DiscoveryChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Network Element Discovery

The Network Element Discovery window for all device types includes the following parameters:

Figure 2-10: Network Element Discovery Window

Parameter Description

Protocol

Type The protocol used for managing the device. In the current release only the SNMP option is available.

SNMP Parameters

Version Indicates the SNMP protocol version used for communicating with the device. The available options are:

v1

v2c

v3

All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).

Agent Address The device’s IP Address.

Port The port number used by the device to communicate with the NMS. The default is 161, which is the port used by all currently manageable devices.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 48

Page 60: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerNetwork Element DiscoveryChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Network Element Discovery

After configuring all necessary parameters, click on the OK button to initiate a single device discovery

process using the defines parameters. If a device that does not exist in the database, with the right

properties and belonging to a device family that can be managed by the NMS is found, and the NMS is

Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP communication with the Device.

The default is 2 retries.

Timeout(s) The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response from the Device before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).

The default is 5 seconds.

SNMP Communities (only for SNMP Versions v1 and v2c)

Read community The Read community string (password) for SNMP get operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP read access.

The default Read community string in the manageable devices is public.

Write community The Write community string (password) for SNMP set operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP write access. The Write community can also be used for read (get) operations.

The default Write community string in the manageable devices is private.

SNMPv3 Credentials (only for SNMP Version v3)

Username Username used for authentication

Security Level Configures the authentication and privacy settings. The available options are:

NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled

Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled

Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled

Authentication Algorithm

Selects the hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password. The available options are:

MD5 - Uses the Message-Digest algorithm 5

SHA - Uses the Secure Hash Algorithm

Authentication Password

Password used for authentication.

Privacy Algorithm Encryption standard used for data transmission. The available options are:

AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard

DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard

Privacy Password Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 49

Page 61: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor

authorized to manage it, it will be added to database and to the devices displayed in the Equipment

main area.

2.9 The Network Element Editor

This section includes:

Introduction to the Network Element Editor

General Tab

SNMP Parameters Tab

2.9.1 Introduction to the Network Element Editor

The Network Element editor enables editing NMS Reference (Location and Contact), SNMP parameters

and coordinates details (if GPS/SNTP is not used by the device) for a single device.

To open the Network Element editor select the required single device and click on the Edit Connectivity

option in the Actions panel.

The Network Element editor includes two tabs:

General Tab

SNMP Parameters Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 50

Page 62: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor

2.9.2 General Tab

The General tab includes the following parameters:

Figure 2-11: Network Element Editor - General Tab

Parameter Description

NMS Reference

Name Read-only. This field displays the network element’s name as defined in the managed device.

Location The location associated with the device in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) and select a location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Location field.

Contact The contact associated with the device in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select contact window (see “The Select contact Window” on page 193) and select a contact. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Contact field.

Coordinates (useful for displaying the location of the device on a map).

GPS Status Indicates the GPS status: Enabled or No GPS.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 51

Page 63: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor

2.9.3 SNMP Parameters Tab

The SNMP Parameters tab includes the following parameters:

Latitude Applicable only if GPS Status is No GPS. Use this field to manually enter the network element’s latitude coordinate. Use positive values for Northern latitudes and negative values for Southern latitudes.

Longitude Applicable only if GPS Status is No GPS. Use this field to manually enter the network element’s longitude coordinate. Use positive values for Eastern longitudes and negative values for Western longitudes.

Altitude Applicable only if GPS Status is No GPS. Use this field to manually enter the network element’s altitude in meters.

Figure 2-12: Network Element Editor - SNMP Parameters Tab

Parameter Description

SNMP Parameters

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 52

Page 64: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Network Element EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Network Element Editor

Version Indicates the SNMP protocol version used for communicating with the device. The available options are:

v1

v2c

v3

All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).

Agent Address The device’s IP Address. Not configurable when editing the properties of an existing object.

Port The port number used by the device to communicate with the NMS. Not configurable when editing the properties of an existing object.

Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP/TFTP communication with the Device.

The range is from 0 to 255.

The default is 2 retries.

Timeout(s) The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response from the Device before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).

The available range is 1 to 3600 seconds.

The default is 15 seconds.

SNMP Communities (only for SNMP Versions v1 and v2)

Read community The Read community string (password) for SNMP get operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP read access.

The default Read community string in the manageable devices is public.

Write community The Write community string (password) for SNMP set operations. This string is used by the SNMP agent to allow/disallow SNMP write access. The Write community can also be used for read (get) operations.

The default Write community string in the manageable devices is private.

SNMPv3 Credentials (only for SNMP Version v3)

Username Username used for authentication

Security Level Configures the authentication and privacy settings. The available options are:

NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled

Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled

Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 53

Page 65: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Common attributes EditorChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Common attributes Editor

2.10 The Common attributes Editor

The Common Attributes editor enables editing the NMS References (Location and Contact) parameters

for multiple devices.

To open the Common Attributes editor select the required devices and click on the Edit Connectivity

option in the Actions panel.

The Common Attributes editor for multiple devices includes the Location and Contact parameters:

By default the Update check-boxes for both Location and Contact attributes are selected. De-select the

attribute(s) you do not want to update (otherwise, if the Update check-box is selected but the relevant

field remains empty, a currently configured attribute in any of the selected devices will be changed to

null).

Configure one or both of the followings:

Authentication Algorithm

Selects the hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password. The available options are:

MD5 - Uses the Message-Digest algorithm 5

SHA - Uses the Secure Hash Algorithm

Authentication Password

Password used for authentication. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.

Privacy Algorithm Encryption standard used for data transmission. The available options are:

AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard

DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard

Privacy Password Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.

Figure 2-13: Common Attributes Editor

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 54

Page 66: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer

2.11 Real-Time Performance Viewer

The Real-Time Performance Viewer provides on-line graphs of selected counters.

In the Equipment Manager, select the required device (its Operational State must be Enabled) and click

on the RT Performance action. The RT Performance viewer for the selected device will open as a new

tab named BTS <BTS Number> RT.

Parameter Description

Location The location to be associated with the devices in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) and select a location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Location field. If a location is selected verify that the relevant Update check-box is selected. Otherwise, verify that the relevant Update check-box is de-selected.

Contact The contact to be associated with the devices in the database of the management system (optional). Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Select contact window (see “The Select contact Window” on page 193) and select a contact. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Contact field. If a contact is selected verify that the relevant Update check-box is selected. Otherwise, verify that the relevant Update check-box is de-selected.

INFORMATION

For information on the information provided by specific counters refer to the Real-Time Performance Counters section in the applicable Device Driver Manual.

To open the Real Time Performance Viewer:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 55

Page 67: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer

The RT Performance viewer include two sections: the counter group selection panel on the left side and

the graph area.

In the counters group selection panel select the counters group to be monitored. If necessary, use the

hide/expose (+/-) sign to the left of a counters group with sub-groups to hide/expose all relevant groups.

To minimize the counters group selection panel (and increase the size of the graph area), click on the

left-pointing red arrow located on the upper right corner of the panel. To maximize it again to its’

original size, click on the right-pointing red arrow that is now located at the left side of the screen.

Select one or several counters groups (to select multiple groups you may use the traditional Ctrl-click and

Shift-click selection/de-selection methods) to view the real-time multiple line graph(s) for all counters

belonging to each of the selected group(s).

Figure 2-14: RT Performance

Figure 2-15: Counters Group Selection Panel

AlvariSTAR User Manual 56

Page 68: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer

The graph for an accumulating counter displays the average rate per second of the relevant value during

the interval from last polling time, defined as: (Current Value-Previous Value)/Polling Interval.

For gauge counters (marked with a * sign before the counter’s name), the absolute value reported at the

polling time is displayed.

Values range of the value (Y) axis is adapted automatically according to actual values of selected graph

counters. Time (X) axis is updated continuously.

Click on the Expand action link of a counters group graph to maximize its displayed area. In expanded

view mode, click on the Restore action link to restore the displayed graph area to its default size.

Click on the Configure action link to view the following configuration options:

Polling (s): Enables configuring the polling rate, in seconds. The default is 5 seconds. Each polling

point is indicated on the line graphs.

Duration: Enables configuring the maximum period of time (X axis value) to be displayed. The

right-most point of a line graph is the last polled value. The left-most point is the starting point, up to

a maximum defined by the duration parameter (older values will be shifted “outside”). The default is

6 hours.

Hide legend check box: The default is selected (hide legends). De-select to display legends and

associated graph colours. When legends are displayed, a check-box next to each legend enables

selecting/de-selecting the relevant counter (by default all counters in the relevant group are selected).

Only selected counters will be displayed in the graph area.

To expand/restore the displayed graph:

To configure the displayed graph:

Figure 2-16: Select equipment

AlvariSTAR User Manual 57

Page 69: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerReal-Time Performance ViewerChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Real-Time Performance Viewer

Reset counters: Click on the button to reset relevant counters.

Click Back to apply changes and exit configuration mode.

Place the mouse over a polling time indication to view momentary values of relevant counters.

Right click on a selected point and drag left/right and/or up/down to shift the displayed graphs in the

time (X-axis) and/or value (Y-axis) domain(s).

Note that after shifting the displayed graphs the time and value axis are “frozen”.

Left-click and drag down and to the right or right-down (starting point should be the upper left corner

of the target area). to draw a rectangle defining the target area. The entire display area will be allocated

to the defined target area.

After shift and/or zoom-in operations, left-click anywhere and drag up and to the right or to the left to

restore the displayed graphs to the original (default) display mode.

Figure 2-17: Counters Legends and Selection Section

To view counters’ values for a specific polling time:

To shift the displayed line graphs:

To zoom-in on a selected time/value range:

To restore the display to its default display mode:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 58

Page 70: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerConfiguration History Request and ReportChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report

2.12 Configuration History Request and Report

The Configuration History Request window enables defining the time interval and filtering parameters

for a Configuration History Report detailing the relevant changes in the configuration of a selected

device.

In the Equipment tab, select the relevant device and click on the Configuration History option in the

Actions panel. The Configuration History Request window opens:

In the Interval section, select Start Date and End Date for the report.

Select the Filter SYSTEM Logs to include in the report only changes made by users of the same NMS

system. De-select this option to include also all changes made by the system. These includes changes

initiated by the device itself (as a response to various events), changes made via Telnet/SNMP, and

changes made using other NMS servers. The default is selected (checked).

Select Summarized Report to show in the report only the changes between the requested Start Date

and End Date. For example, if a certain parameter was modified more than once during the specified

interval, only a single change entry will be provided, indicating the last relevant change (the value in

Changed From will be the value at Start Date). If following any series of changes the status of a certain

parameter at End Date is the same as in Start Date, no change will be indicated in the report. De-select

INFORMATION

The Configuration History feature is applicable only for devices that support this feature (4Motion and COMPACT).

To open the Configuration History Request window:

Figure 2-18: The Configuration History Request

AlvariSTAR User Manual 59

Page 71: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerConfiguration History Request and ReportChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager Configuration History Request and Report

the Summarized Report option to include in the report all changes history. The default is de-selected

(unchecked).

Click on the OK button to generate the requested report.

The Configuration History Report title includes identification details:

BTS Name

BTS Number

Address (IP address used for management)

Interval of the report (From-To)

For each change included in the report the following details are provided:

Figure 2-19: The Configuration History Report

Parameter Description

Group The type of entity that was changed.

Instance Identification of the specific entity that was changed.

Parameter The specific parameter that was changed (applicable only for MOD operation).

Operation Type of change: ADD, DEL (Delete), MOD (Modify).

Changed From The value of the parameter before the change (applicable only for MOD operation). In a Summarized Report this is the value at the Start Date of the report.

Changed To The value of the parameter after the change (applicable only for MOD operation). In a Summarized Report this is the value after the last change to the parameter during the report’s interval.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 60

Page 72: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 2 - The Equipment ManagerThe Equipment Selector WindowChapter 2 - The Equipment Manager The Equipment Selector Window

Double-click on an entry to open a Record Data window providing all configuration details of the

relevant Group’s Instance.

You can use the Filter option to view only changes associated with a specific group (entity type). Type a

string of characters to filter the list on the fly. Only Groups that include the entered string will be

displayed.

To export the report as a CSV file, click on the Export button to open the Export dialog box, allowing

you to define file name and location.

2.13 The Equipment Selector Window

The Equipment Selector window is opened whenever there is a need to select equipment (typically for

adding equipment to a task). Only relevant devices are included in the displayed list. You may use the

Find Equipment panel to search for devices that meet specific criteria.

Select a single or multiple devices (you can use the traditional Ctrl-click and Shift-click

selection/de-selection methods) and click Apply to add the selected device(s) to the relevant equipment

list.

Changed By The user that made the change. In a Summarized Report this is the user that made the last change to the relevant parameter.

Changed At Time and date of the change. In a Summarized Report this is the time and date of the last change to the relevant parameter.

Configuration Section Click the Go To Section cut-through link to open a new BTS tab for the relevant device. The relevant configuration page (or the general Site/BTS page if there is no specific configuration page for the relevant Group) will be opened automatically.

Figure 2-20: Equipment Selector

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 61

Page 73: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events Manager

In This Chapter:

Introduction to the Active Events Manager

Active Events Main Area

Event Details

Active Events Actions Panel

Find Events Panel

Page 74: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerIntroduction to the Active Events ManagerChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Introduction to the Active Events Manager

3.1 Introduction to the Active Events Manager

The Active Events Manager displays details of currently active events received by the management

system from devices that can be managed by the specific user, enabling management and diagnosis of

events.

Select the Active Events tab header in the tabs ribbon. The Active Events Manager screen is displayed.

3.2 Active Events Main Area

This section includes:

Active Events Table

Event Types

Event Severity

Toggle Counter

3.2.1 Active Events Table

To open the Active Events Manager:

INFORMATION The Active Events tab header includes a red oval with the number of active events with critical severity. If there are no critical severity events the red oval will not be displayed. The relevant list of active events includes all active events received from devices that can be managed by the specific user and is not affected by any settings in the Find panel.

Figure 3-1: The Active Events Table

AlvariSTAR User Manual 63

Page 75: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area

The Active Events Main Area comprises a table that by default includes all the currently active events that

were received from devices that can be managed by the specific user. The display is updated whenever

an alarm is received or cleared.

To freeze the display such that the display of incoming alarms is suppressed, click on the Freeze button

located above the table in the top right corner of the Main Area. When in Freeze mode, the button label

changes to Unfreeze, enabling to return to the default state of displaying incoming alarms on the fly.

By default, only events that are categorized as alarms are displayed. However, in the event template of

an event belonging to another event category (severity Other) the event may be defined as Requires

Acknowledge (see “Behavior Tab” on page 137). Such events will also be included in Active Events. Such

an event cannot be cleared (either manually or automatically) and it will be removed from the Active

Events table only after acknowledging it.

Cleared events are removed from the Active Events display and can only be viewed in the Event History

Manager (see “Event History Manager” on page 105). The cleared events that are not displayed include:

Manually cleared alarms

Alarms cleared by the automatic correlation rules

Alarms associated to a device that can no longer be managed by the system

Multiple occurrences of the same alarm (only one instance is visible in Active Events. For more details

see.“Toggle Counter” on page 67).

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the information displayed for each active event includes:

Parameter Description

Event Severity Icon An event icon whose color is according to event severity:

Critical: Red

Major: Orange

Minor: Yellow

Warning: Blue

Indeterminate: Purple

Cleared: Green (shown for a short time only)

Other: Grey (applicable only for non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge option selected).

The Icon column has a fixed width and it cannot be moved or deleted.

Severity The severity of the event. Refer to “Event Severity” on page 66.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 64

Page 76: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area

Additional optional information columns (not included in the default view) are:

3.2.2 Event Types

The possible Event Types for Alarms are:

Other: Used to report an alarm event not covered by any of the following alarm event types.

Communication Alarm: Used to report when the object detects a communications error.

Quality Of Service Alarm: Used to report a failure in the quality of service of the managed object.

Processing Error Alarm: Used to report processing failure in a managed object.

Equipment Alarm: Used to report a failure in the equipment.

Environmental Alarm: used to report a problem in the environment.

Integrity Violation: Used to report that a potential interruption in information flow has occurred such

that information may have been illegally modified, inserted or deleted.

Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing the event (see “Event Templates Manager” on page 128).

Receive Time The time and date of receiving the event.

Event Time The time and date of the event occurrence.

IP Address The IP address of the equipment reporting this event.

Equipment Type The type of equipment reporting this event.

Equipment The name of the equipment reporting this event, accompanied by the BTS Number.

Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.

Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.

Event Type The classification type of the event. Available event types vary according to the event category. For more details see “Event Types” on page 65.

Parameter Description

Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).

Ack Time The date and time the event was acknowledged (if applicable).

Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.

Location The location assigned to the equipment reporting the event (if any).

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 65

Page 77: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area

Operational Violation: Used to report that the provision of the requested service was not possible due

to the unavailability, malfunction or incorrect invocation of the service.

Physical Violation: Used to report that a physical resource has been violated in a way that indicates a

potential security attack.

Security Service Or Mechanism Violation: Used to report that a security attack has been detected by a

security service or mechanism.

Time Domain Violation: used to report that an event has occurred at an unexpected or prohibited

time.

For other event categories (non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge

option selected) the possible Event Types are:

3.2.3 Event Severity

The management system is delivered with a set of default event severity definitions, each with its own

default color.

The default severity definitions for alarm events are:

Event Category Event Type

State Change State Or Status Change

System Event System Event

Software Download

Backup Configuration File

Maintenance

Telnet Session

Config Change Config Change

Entity Added

Entity Changed

Entity Removed

Parameter Description

Critical (red) A service-halting condition occurs, requiring immediate corrective action. The equipment is completely out of service and you must restore its capability.

Major (orange) A service-affecting condition has developed and corrective action is required. There is severe degradation in the equipment’s capability and you must restore its full capability.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 66

Page 78: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Main AreaChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Main Area

For non-alarm events (applicable only for events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge

option selected) the severity is Other.

The Severity of events received from managed devices is according to the severity level defined in the

device for each specific event.

3.2.4 Toggle Counter

Toggle Events are a group of events that are associated to the same Network Element, have the same

attributes but not the same event time and are raised and cleared repeatedly before the management

system is able to clear and remove the event from the Active Events list.

The attributes used for matching a Toggle Event are:

equipmentId

eventOID

eventCategory

moType

moInstance

managedObject

eventType

probableCause

In order to avoid flooding the Active Events table with toggling events, these events will be suppressed

and an attribute named Toggle Counter that cumulates the number of toggle occurrences, is used in the

Active Events table. If a Toggle Event already exists in the Active Events table, only an update will be

performed, incrementing the Toggle Counter attribute and changing the event severity and timestamp

Minor (yellow) A non-service-affecting fault condition exists and corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault. The detected event condition is not currently degrading the capacity of the equipment.

Warning (blue) A potential or impending service-affecting fault could occur, and no significant effects have yet been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem to prevent it from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault. The detected event condition does not currently pose a problem, but may degrade the capacity of the equipment if you do not take corrective action.

Indeterminate (purple) Indicates an event for which the perceived severity is uncertain, due to any cause.

Cleared (green) The problem has been corrected.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 67

Page 79: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details

to the severity and timestamp of the last Toggle Event. The Toggle Counter is displayed in parenthesis

next to the event’s Severity in the Active Events table.

All instances of the toggling events can be found on the Event History in case required for further

analysis.

3.3 Event Details

The Event Details section is applicable only for s single selected event and it includes the following tabs:

Events Details General Tab

Events Details Status Tab

Events Details Parameters Tab

Events Details Other Info Tab

Events Details Notes Tab

3.3.1 Events Details General Tab

The General tab displays the following details for the selected event:

Figure 3-2: Event Details General Tab

Parameter Description

Equipment Name The name of the equipment.

Equipment Type The type of equipment.

Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.

Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 68

Page 80: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details

3.3.2 Events Details Status Tab

The Status tab displays the following details for the selected event:

Location Name The location assigned to the equipment.

Event Category The category classification of the event. The event categories are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change. For Active Events only Alarm category is applicable.

Event Type The classification type of the event. Event types vary according to the event category. For details refer to “Event Types” on page 65.

Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing.

Event Description A general description of the event.

Event Severity The severity of the event.

Object Severity The event severity of the managed object associated with the event.

Figure 3-3: Event Details Status Tab

Parameter Description

Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.

Receive Time The date and time at which the event was received.

Event Time The date and time at which the event actually occurred.

Ack Time The date and time at which event was acknowledged (if applicable).

Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).

Clear Time The date and time that the event was cleared (if applicable).

Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 69

Page 81: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details

3.3.3 Events Details Parameters Tab

The Parameters tab displays the following details for the selected event:

3.3.4 Events Details Other Info Tab

The Other Info tab displays the following details for the selected event:

Figure 3-4: Event Details Parameters Tab

Parameter Description

Event Severity The severity of the event.

Object Severity The severity of the object associated with the event.

Probable Cause The probable cause of the event.

Specific Problem The specific problem that caused the event.

Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).

Clear Time The date and time at which the event was cleared (if applicable).

Clear Cause The reason the event was cleared (if applicable).

Figure 3-5: Event Details Other Info Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 70

Page 82: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerEvent DetailsChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Event Details

In addition, a table that contains all trap attributes together their OID and Value is displayed at the

bottom.

3.3.5 Events Details Notes Tab

The Notes tab displays the following details for the selected event

Parameter Description

Protocol The protocol used for the event. The current version supports SNMP only.

Source IP Address The IP address of the equipment that sent the event.

SNMP Version The number of SNMP version used by the equipment.

Generic Trap The generic trap code. It indicates an enterprise specific trap. Possible values: 0,1,2,3,4,6

Specific Trap The specific trap code as defined in the MIB, used only if Generic trap is 6.

Enterprise OID The SNMP trap Object Identification number.

System Up Time Up time of the equipment.

Figure 3-6: Event Details Notes Tab

Parameter Description

Event Advisor Displays a text description of the event and sometimes proposes a remedy. For example, “The device has received an improperly authorized protocol message. The message has been discarded.” The default message displayed in the Advisor page comes from the trap’s MIB, but the message can be edited in the Event Template Editor Behavior page (see “Behavior Tab” on page 137). The Advisor message is the default message for any e-mails sent about the event.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 71

Page 83: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerActive Events Actions PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Active Events Actions Panel

3.4 Active Events Actions Panel

The Active Events Actions panel includes the following sections:

Operations

View

3.4.1 Operations

The Operations section includes the following options

Proposed Repair Actions The proposed remedy for the event. The remedy comes from the trap’s MIB.

General Notes Additional information about the specific event that is optionally defined using the Event Notes action.

Option Action

Acknowledge Acknowledges the selected event(s). The current date and time appear in the Ack Time field, and the name of the currently logged-on user appears in the Ack By field. For a single selected event, applicable only for an unacknowledged event. For multiple selected events, always applicable: only previously unacknowledged events will be acknowledged.

Non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge option selected will be removed from the table only after acknowledgement.

Unacknowledge Unacknowledges previously acknowledged selected event(s), and clears the entries in the Ack By and Ack Time fields.

For a single selected event, applicable only for an acknowledged event. For multiple selected events, always applicable: only previously unacknowledged events will be acknowledged. Only events that were previously acknowledged by the current user can be unacknowledged. Events acknowledged by other users cannot be unacknowledged.

Clear Clears selected event(s). The cleared event(s) will be removed from the Active Events table and will be identified as cleared in Events History. Cleared By and Clear Time fields for applicable event(s) in Event History will be updated accordingly.

Not applicable for non-alarm events defined in the template with the Requires Acknowledge option selected. These events will be removed from the table only after acknowledgement.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 72

Page 84: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerFind Events PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Find Events Panel

3.4.2 View

The View section includes the following options:

3.5 Find Events Panel

This section includes:

Regular Search/Filter View

The Hierarchy View

Configure Opens a BTS configuration manager for the relevant device, enabling full configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>. Not available if two or more events are selected. The BTS configuration manager will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.

Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the relevant device in a separate window. Not available if two or more events are selected. A Telnet session will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.

Export Exports the selected event(s) and creates a Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected event(s) are exported, including columns that are currently hidden.

Click to open the Export Events window, browse to the desired location on the client file-system, enter the File Name, and click Export to export the event(s).

Event Notes Click to open the Event Notes window, enabling to provide additional information about the specific event, such as steps already taken to correct the problem. The note is stored with the event and is displayed in the Event Details Notes tab.

Option Action

Open Location Available only for a single selected event. Opens the logical map for the location of the relevant device (provided it has an assigned location). For details refer to “The Logical Location Map” on page 100.

Print Preview Displays a preview of the current page before printing. See details in Print below.

Print Prints the entire current page, including columns that are currently hidden.

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 73

Page 85: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerFind Events PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Find Events Panel

3.5.1 Regular Search/Filter View

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is performed on Equipment column (including BTS Number).

Pre-defined Filters include:

Severity: Available options include all possible relevant severities. Each severity will be accompanied by

(X/Y), where X is the number of currently displayed (filtered using all possible search/filter options)

events with the relevant severity, and Y is the current total number of events with the relevant severity

in the database. Multiple selection of different Severities is supported.

Acknowledged: Enabling to display only acknowledged events (see Acknowledge action above).

Equipment Type: Available options include all possible equipment (NE) types that are supported by the

currently installed Device Drivers, plus the NMS equipment. Multiple selection is supported. Multiple

selection of different Equipment Types is supported.

Managed Object Type: Available option include all MO Types relevant to the selected Equipment

Type(s). Multiple selection of different Managed Object Types is supported.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Equipment

IP Address

Event Type

3.5.2 The Hierarchy View

The Active Events Manager allows also filtering based on equipment locations using the location-based

hierarchy view.

To switch to location-based hierarchy view, click on the Hierarchy View icon ( ) on the top of the

panel. To switch back to the regular Search/Filter view, click on the regular Search/View icon ( ).

The hierarchy view displays the location-based hierarchy of the network, as defined in the Locations

Manager (see “The Locations Manager” on page 95).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 74

Page 86: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 3 - The Active Events ManagerFind Events PanelChapter 3 - The Active Events Manager Find Events Panel

Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant

sub-locations.

You can use the free-text Find text box together with the Next and Previous buttons to find locations

that include the search string anywhere in their name.

Use the check-boxes to select required locations/sub-locations. Only events associated with devices

whose location matches any of the selected locations will be displayed in the Main Area.

By default all events generated by devices without an assigned location are also displayed. De-select the

Show Unallocated check-box to remove the events generated by these devices from the displayed list.

Figure 3-7: Find Events Hierarchy View

AlvariSTAR User Manual 75

Page 87: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration Operations

In This Chapter:

“The Offline Project Configuration Manager” on page 77

“The Offline Building Blocks Manager” on page 82

“The Configuration Templates Manager” on page 84

“The GPS Chains Manager” on page 89

“The Locations Manager” on page 95

Page 88: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager

4.1 The Offline Project Configuration Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Offline Project Configuration Manager

Offline Project Configuration Main Area

Offline Project Configuration Actions Panel

Find Project Panel

The Create Project Window

4.1.1 Introduction to the Offline Project Configuration Manager

Operators are faced with the need for quick and efficient deployment of a large number of new sites

once the operation goes into its commercial phase. As many of the installations share most of the

configuration parameters, all the common configuration parameters can be defined once and then

copied to all sites. However, certain configuration parameters must be configured per site.

The Configuration Tool is a wizard that supports easy and simple preparation of common parameters

files and automatic generation of a draft for per-site unique parameters file that can be used for fast

creation of per-site configuration files.

The Offline Project Configuration Manager enables management of common parameters files (Projects),

including preparation of new Projects and Draft Unique Parameters Files using the Configuration Tool,

editing a previously prepared Project, and initiating the Mass Configuration Wizard for generation of

per-site configuration files based on a previously prepared Project and a per-site Unique Parameters File.

Select Configuration Operation>Offline Project Configuration from the Main Menu. The Offline Project

Configuration tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Offline Project Configuration Manager screen is

displayed.

INFORMATIONThe Offline Project Configuration Manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature. In the current release this includes only COMPACT.

To open the Offline Data Manager:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 77

Page 89: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager

4.1.2 Offline Project Configuration Main Area

The Offline Project Configuration grid view comprises a table that includes all the offline projects that

exist in the database of the management system.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each offline project include:

4.1.3 Offline Project Configuration Actions Panel

The Offline Project Configuration Actions panel includes the following options:

Figure 4-1: Offline Project Configuration Table

Parameter Description

Name The name of the Project. The default name is Project_Offline_<YYYYMMDDHHMM> indicating the creation date and time of the Project file.

Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the Project file was prepared.

Release Number The applicable release number. A Project prepared for a certain combination of Equipment Type/Release Number can be used for preparing configuration files only for matching network elements (same Equipment Type and formal release number).

Owner The name of the NMS user that prepared the Project file.

Creation Date Date and time of Project file’s creation.

Type The Type of the Project File;

Multiple Site: A Project prepared using the Multiple Configuration Wizard supporting preparation of configuration files for multiple sites simultaneously.

Single Site: A Project prepared using the Single Site Configuration Wizard supporting preparation of a configuration file for a single site.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 78

Page 90: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager

4.1.4 Find Project Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is not available for projects.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Equipment Type: Available options include equipment types that are actually available in the Projects

database. Each Equipment Type will be accompanied by the current number of instances in the

templates list.

Option Action

New Opens the Create Project window enabling to specify the Equipment Type, Release Number and Wizard type for creating a new Project file. For details see “The Create Project Window” on page 80.

Edit Opens the Configuration Tool used for preparing the selected Project, enabling to edit it. For details refer to the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard section in the relevant Device Driver manual.

Delete Deletes the selected Project file(s) from the database.

Mass Configuration Available only for a single Multiple Site Project. Opens the Mass Configuration Wizard for creating Offline Configuration Files (see “Using the Mass Configuration Wizard” on page 181) based on the selected Project.

Export Draft Unique File Available only for a single Multiple Site Project. Exports the applicable Draft Unique File (generated during Project creation) to a selected location. Click to open the Save window, browse to the required location on the client file-system, and click Save. The default name of the file is Project_Offline_<creation_date>_Unique.xls. You may define a different File Name before clicking Save.

Generate Offline Config File

Available only for a single Single Site Project. Generates an offline configuration file and saves it in the Data Files Manager. The default name is YYYYMMDDHHMM (date and time at which the file was added to the Data Files database). In the Data Files Manager you may use the Restore task for loading offline configuration file(s) to the target device(s).

NOTE: The offline configuration file is automatically generated and added to the Data Files Manager upon successful completion of the project. To avoid duplicate files with different names (as the name is based on the time at which the file is added to the database), this option should be used only if the original file was accidentally deleted from the database.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 79

Page 91: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager

Release Number: Available options include only release number that are actually available in the

Projects database. Each Release Number will be accompanied by the current number of instances in

the database.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Type

Name

Owner

Creation Date

4.1.5 The Create Project Window

To open the Create Project window select the New option in the Offline Project Configuration manager:

The Create Project window includes the following parameters:

Figure 4-2: The Create Project Window

Parameter Description

Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the Project will be prepared.

Release Number The applicable release number. A Project prepared for a certain combination of Equipment Type/Release Number can be used for preparing configuration files only for matching network elements (same equipment type and formal release number).

Wizard The type of wizard to be used for preparing the Project file:

Multiple Configuration Tool: Supporting future preparation of configuration files for multiple devices simultaneously, using an Excel file with per-site unique parameters.

Single Site Configuration Tool: Supporting preparation of a configuration file for a single device, including all mandatory unique parameters.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 80

Page 92: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Project Configuration ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Project Configuration Manager

Click OK to start the Configuration Tool wizard. For details refer to the Offline Configuration Tool

Wizard section in the relevant Device Driver manual.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 81

Page 93: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Building Blocks ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Building Blocks Manager

4.2 The Offline Building Blocks Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Offline Building Blocks Manager

Offline Building Blocks Main Area

Offline Building Blocks Actions Panel

Find Building Block Panel

4.2.1 Introduction to the Offline Building Blocks Manager

The Building Block view enables viewing/deleting previously saved Offline Building Blocks. A Building

Block includes a certain group of parameters with specific values that was previously saved in the

database during preparation or editing of an Offline Project. These Building Blocks may be re-used when

preparing a new Project or when editing an existing one. For more details refer to the section on Using

the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Select Configuration Operation>Offline Building Blocks from the Main Menu. The Offline Building Blocks

tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Offline Building Blocks Manager screen is displayed.

4.2.2 Offline Building Blocks Main Area

INFORMATIONThe Offline Building Blocks Manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support the Offline Project Configurations feature. In the current release this includes only COMPACT.

To open the Offline Building Blocks Manager:

Figure 4-3: Offline Building Blocks Table

AlvariSTAR User Manual 82

Page 94: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Offline Building Blocks ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Offline Building Blocks Manager

The Offline Building Blocks grid view comprises a table that includes all the offline building block that

exist in the database of the management system.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each offline building block include:

4.2.3 Offline Building Blocks Actions Panel

The Offline Building Blocks Actions panel includes the following options:

4.2.4 Find Building Block Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is not available for building blocks.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Equipment Type: Available options include equipment types that are actually available in the Offline

Building Blocks database. Each Equipment Type will be accompanied by the current number of

instances in the templates list.

Release Number: Available options include only release number that are actually available in the

Offline Building Blocks database. Each Release Number will be accompanied by the current number of

instances in the database.

Advanced Filters include the Type and Name criteria.

Parameter Description

Name The name of the Building Block as defined when it was saved (see Using the Offline Configuration Tool Wizard in the relevant Device Driver Manual).

Equipment Type The type of relevant equipment.

Type The Building Block Type (according to the applicable step of the wizard).

Release Number The relevant formal release number.

Option Action

Delete Deletes the selected Building Block(s) from the database.

View Block Opens a read-only view of the Building Block.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 83

Page 95: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager

4.3 The Configuration Templates Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Configuration Templates Manager

Configuration Templates Main Area

Configuration Templates Actions Panel

Find Templates Panel

The Template Editor

The Template Selector Window

4.3.1 Introduction to the Configuration Templates Manager

The Configuration Templates Manager enables managing equipment configuration templates that can

be used for modifying configuration of selected devices using the template-based Multiple

Configuration task (see “Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225).

For details on configuring specific templates refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant

Device Driver Manual.

Select Configuration Operations > Configuration Templates from the Main Menu. The Configuration

Templates tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the Configuration Templates Manager is displayed.

To open the Configuration Templates Manager

Figure 4-4: The Configuration Template Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 84

Page 96: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager

4.3.2 Configuration Templates Main Area

The Configuration Templates grid view comprises a table that includes all the configuration templates

that exist in the database of the management system.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each configuration template includes:

:

Depending on the installed Device Driver(s), the system may be supplied with several default templates

for some typical deployment scenarios of the relevant equipment. The template’s name provide the main

properties of the relevant deployment scenario (for details refer to the Configuring Templates section in

the relevant Device Driver Manual). Default templates cannot be modified or deleted. To create a

different template based on an existing default template, select the required source template and use

the Copy action.

4.3.3 Configuration Templates Actions Panel

The Configuration Templates Actions panel includes the following options:

Figure 4-5: The Configuration Templates Table

Parameter Description

Name The name of the template

Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the template is prepared.

MO Type The type of Managed Object for which the template is applicable.

Release Number The Release Number for which the template is applicable.

Owner The user that created the template.

Option Action

New Adds a new template object to the database. Click to open the Template Editor, allowing to define general properties of the template to be created. For more details, see “The Template Editor” on page 87.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 85

Page 97: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager

4.3.4 Find Templates Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is not available for templates.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Equipment Type: Available options include only equipment types that are actually available in the

configuration templates database. Each Equipment Type will be accompanied by the current number

of instances in the database.

Edit Not available if two or more templates are selected. Not available for default templates. Opens the Template Editor for the selected template, allowing to edit the Name and Description of the template. All other properties of an existing template cannot be modified. For more details, see “The Template Editor” on page 87.

Copy Not available if two or more templates are selected. Opens the Template Editor for a new template, that is identical to the selected “source” template, with the default name of “Copy of <source template name>. You can edit only the Name and Description of the new template. All other properties of the new template cannot be modified. For more details, see “The Template Editor” on page 87.

Configure Not available if two or more templates are selected. Opens the Template Configuration Editor for the selected template. For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Apply Not available if two or more templates are selected. Opens the Multiple Configuration Task editor, allowing to initiate a Multiple Configuration task using the selected template. For more details refer to “Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225.

Delete Not available for default templates. Deletes the selected template(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation.

Import Imports a template XML file from the client file-system. Click to open the Import window, browse to the location on the client file-system where the file is stored, select the file and click Import. The Template Editor will open, allowing you to modify the Name and Description of the imported file.

Export Not available if two or more templates are selected. Exports the selected template XML file to the client file-system. Click to open the Export Equipment Template window, browse to the desired location on the client file-system, if necessary change the name to be assigned to the template file in the client file-system, and click Export to export the template.

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 86

Page 98: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager

MO Type: Available options include only MO types that are actually available in the configuration

templates database. Each MO Type will be accompanied by the current number of instances in the

database.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Name

Release Number

Owner

4.3.5 The Template Editor

The Template editor enables creating a new template, editing an existing template (excluding default

templates) and creating a new template based on a copy of an existing one.

The Template Editor comprises the following fields:

Figure 4-6: The Template Editor

Parameter Description

Name The name of the template. A string of 1 to 128 characters.

Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task. A string of 0 to 250 characters.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 87

Page 99: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Configuration Templates ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Configuration Templates Manager

4.3.6 The Template Selector Window

The Template Selector window is opened whenever there is a need to select a template for a multiple

configuration task.

When opened from the Equipment Manager (using the Multiple Configuration option), only templates

with Equipment Type matching the type of selected device(s) will be displayed.

You may use the Find Template panel to search for template(s) that meet specific criteria.

Select a single template and click Apply to open/return to the Multiple Configuration Task window

(see.“Multiple Configuration Task” on page 225).

Equipment Type The type of equipment for which the template is prepared. Can be configured only for a new template. Available types depend on the installed Device Driver(s). For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Release Number The Release Number for which the template is applicable. Can be configured only for a new template. Available Release Numbers depend on the selected Equipment Type. For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

MO Type The type of Managed Object for which the template is applicable. Can be configured only for a new template. Available MO Types depend on the selected Equipment Type and Release Number. For more details refer to the Configuring Templates section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

Owner Read-only. The user that created the template.

Creation Date Read-only. The date and time of template’s creation.

Figure 4-7: Template Selector

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 88

Page 100: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager

4.4 The GPS Chains Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the GPS Chains Manager

GPS Chains Main Area

GPS Chains Details Panel

GPS Chains Actions Panel

Find GPS Chain Panel

The GPS Chain Editor

4.4.1 Introduction to the GPS Chains Manager

GPS chaining enables several collocated using a single clock synchronization source. Each chain should

include a single Master unit (connected to a GPS receiver if available) and one or more slave units. A unit

configured as Slave 1 should be connected to the Master, Slave 2 to Slave 1, and so on.

The GPS Chains Manager provides functionality and access to windows that let you manage the GPS

chains and GPS functionality of specific devices in your network.

Select Configuration Operation>GPS Chains from the Main Menu. The GPS Chains tab is added to the

tabs ribbon and the GPS Chains Manager screen is displayed.

The GPS Chains Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

INFORMATIONThe GPS Chains Manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support the GPS chaining feature. In the current release this includes only Extreme.

To open the GPS Chains Manager:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 89

Page 101: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager

4.4.2 GPS Chains Main Area

The GPS Chains grid view comprises a table that includes all the GPS chains that exist in the database of

the management system.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each chain include:

:

Figure 4-8: GPS Chains Table

Parameter Description

Location The location assigned to the Master devices.

Chain Number The unique identifier of the chain.

Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout

Upon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS, or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum (two satellites), the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 10 MHz clock. After a certain time (defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below), it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the BTS and sectors belonging to neighboring BTSs. If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable, the BTS will stop transmitting after this timeout (unless the unit has exited Hold Over mode following proper reception of at least four satellites), to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other BTSs. If it is set to Disable, transmissions will continue indefinitely, at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other BTSs.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 90

Page 102: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager

4.4.3 GPS Chains Details Panel

For a single selected chain, the Details section provide the following details for each device belonging to

the chain:

:

For multiple selected chains no details are displayed.

Hold Over Passed Timeout (min)

This parameter defines the Hold Over time-out, after which there might be interferences to other sectors. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled, transmissions will stop after this timeout. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled, this timeout indicates that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors.

GPS Type The type of GPS being used, as configured in the Master device (Trimble or None).

Local clock difference from UTC

This is the offset of the local time from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

Number of Master The number of devices configured as Masters. This number should be 1: Any other value will be colored red, indicating a configuration problem that should be corrected.

Figure 4-9: GPS Chains Details

Parameter Description

Name The equipment name. Click on the name of a device to open the Device Configuration manager for the selected device. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>.

Type The equipment type.

IP Address The management IP address of the equipment.

Clock Mode The current Clock Mode of the equipment (Master, Slave 1, etc.)

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 91

Page 103: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager

4.4.4 GPS Chains Actions Panel

The GPS Chains Actions panel includes the following options:

4.4.5 Find GPS Chain Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filters option are not available for GPS Chains.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Chain Number

Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout

Hold Over Passed Timeout (min)

GPS Type

Local clock difference from UTC

Number of Masters

4.4.6 The GPS Chain Editor

The GPS Chain Editor enables creating new chains and viewing/modifying all chain parameters that

should be the same in all devices that belong to the same chain.

To configure a new GPS Chain: Click on the New option.

To edit an existing chain: Select the chain and click on the Open option.

Option Action

New Adds a new GPS Chain to the list of chains. The GPS Chain Editor (see “The GPS Chain Editor” on page 92) opens, allowing to co configure the chain parameters.

Open Select a single GPS Chain and click on the Open option open the GPS Chain Editor (see “The GPS Chain Editor” on page 92) for the selected chain.

Delete Deletes the selected chain(s) from the database. You can delete only chains that are not associated to any device.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 92

Page 104: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager

tThe GPS Chain Editor includes the following parameters:

Figure 4-10: GPS Chain Editor

Parameter Description

Chain Number Configurable only when defining a new chain. Read-only when updating an existing chain. The Chain Number is used as a unique identifier of a chain. All devices belonging to the same chain should be configured with the same Chain Number.

The range is from 1 to 1500.

Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout

Upon losing the 1PPS clock from the GPS, or if the received clock is not considered accurate enough because the number of received satellites dropped below the minimum (two satellites), the local 1PPS clock will be generated using the available 10 MHz clock. After a certain time (defined by the Hold Over Passed Timeout parameters described below), it is assumed that due to clock drifts there might be interferences among sectors belonging to the BTS and sectors belonging to neighboring BTSs. If the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout parameter is set to Enable, the BTS will stop transmitting after this timeout (unless the unit has exited Hold Over mode following proper reception of at least four satellites), to prevent interferences to the sectors belonging to other BTSs. If it is set to Disable, transmissions will continue indefinitely, at the expense of potential interferences to sectors belonging to other BTSs.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 93

Page 105: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe GPS Chains ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The GPS Chains Manager

The Equipment table enables viewing the details of devices associated to the chain and adding devices

to a chain. The Equipment table will display the following details for each of the displayed device:

Name

Type

IP Address

Current and Configured Clock Mode (Master/Slave 1/Slave 2/Slave 3/Slave 4/Slave 5).

All parameters are read-only except to Configured Clock Mode.

To Add one or several devices to the chain, click on Add. The Select Equipment window (see “The

Equipment Selector Window” on page 61) will open, allowing addition of one or several devices to the

chain. You may click on Revert to cancel the last changes you made (as long as they are not applied

yet).

Hold Over Passed Timeout (min)

This parameter defines the Hold Over timeout, after which there might be interferences to other sectors. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is enabled, transmissions will stop after this timeout. When the Stop Tx After Hold Over Timeout is disabled, this timeout indicates that there might be interferences to neighboring sectors.

The range is from 0 to 2880 (minutes).

Time Zone Offset From UTC

This is the offset of the local time from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).

The range is from -12:00 up to +13:00 in 30 minutes resolution. The format must be either -XX:YY or +XX:YY where YY is either 00 or 30.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 94

Page 106: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

4.5 The Locations Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Locations Manager

Locations Main Area

Location Details Panel

Locations Actions Panel

Find Locations Panel

Location Editor

Coordinate Types

The Logical Location Map

The Select location Window

4.5.1 Introduction to the Locations Manager

The Locations Manager enables to specify information regarding the physical location of managed

equipment, to facilitate quick detection of managed objects and help drill down quickly when using

location-based hierarchy view to view specific equipment.

Note that the location assigned to a device by the management system may differ from the location

parameter configured in the device.

Note that a location can have a “Parent” Location, meaning that it belongs to a subset of another

location. For example, if network objects are on the third floor of a facility, you can designate both the

building and the specific floor as locations; the building would be the parent of the floor. You may

define multiple levels for locations. In the current example, the city in which the building is located can

be defined as the parent location of the building, and so on.

To associate either a single device with a location or several devices with the same location, use the Edit

Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager (see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50 and

“The Common attributes Editor” on page 54).

You may also simplify the location assignment process by specifying locations in discovery task’s

definitions (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219).

Select Configuration Operations > Locations from the Main Menu. The Locations tab is added to the

tabs ribbon and the Locations Manager is displayed.

To open the Locations Manager:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 95

Page 107: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

4.5.2 Locations Main Area

Locations are displayed using hierarchy view.

The icon indicates location type: Location ( ) or Building ( ).

Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant

sub-locations.

4.5.3 Location Details Panel

The read-only information available in the Location Details section for a single selected location includes:

Location Name

Parent (if applicable)

Figure 4-11: Locations Manager Main Area

Figure 4-12: Location Details

AlvariSTAR User Manual 96

Page 108: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

Coordinate Type

Coordinates (if defined)

Postal Address (if defined)

Location Details (if defined)

For details on these parameters refer to “Location Editor” on page 97.

For multiple selected locations no details are displayed.

4.5.4 Locations Actions Panel

The Locations Actions panel includes the following options:

4.5.5 Find Locations Panel

You can use the free-text Find text box in the Find Locations panel together with the Next and Previous

buttons to find locations that include the defined search string anywhere in their name.

4.5.6 Location Editor

The Location Editor enables creating a new location or modifying details of an existing location.

Option Action

New Opens the Location editor window, allowing definition of a new location. See Location Editor below for details.

Edit Available only for a single selected location. Opens the Location editor window with the current configuration of the selected location, enabling to modify the configuration. See Location Editor below for details.

Delete Enables to delete the selected location(s) from the database. When deleting a parent location, the application also deletes its associated child locations. If a location or one of its childs is associated with equipment or specified in any discovery task it cannot be deleted.

Add Child Available only for a single selected location. Opens the Location editor window with the name of the selected location displayed in the Parent field, allowing definition of a new child location that will be subordinate to the selected location. See Location Editor below for details.

To create/modify a location:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 97

Page 109: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

1 In the Actions panel:

» Click on New to create a new location, or

» Select a location and click on Edit to modify the selected location, or

» Select a location and click on click on Add Child to create a child location that will be

subordinate to the selected location.

2 Type in or modify the Location Editor fields as required:

Figure 4-13: Location Editor (New)

Parameter Description

General parameters

Name Enter a unique name for the location, up to 32 printable characters.

Parent Optional. The parent of this location (the location to which this location is subordinate). Click the Open Selector icon to open the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) through which you can select a Parent location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the Parent field.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 98

Page 110: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

3 Click OK.

4.5.7 Coordinate Types

You can define locations using a variety of coordinate types, enabling accurate definition of locations for

information purposes. The following are the default coordinate types:

Coordinate Type Optional. Specifies the way coordinates are designated; see Coordinate Types below for more information. Valid types are: Country-City, Latitude-Longitude, Area Code-prefix, Vertical-Horizontal. The default is Country-City. This parameter is for information purposes only and is not used by the management system.

Coordinates Optional. The coordinates of the location, using the Coordinate Type specified above. Up to 80 printable characters. This parameter is for information purposes only and is not used by the management system.

Images

Icon Select an icon from the drop-down list to associate it with the location.

Available icons are: Building, Location. The default is Building.

Topology Image Optional. Click the Open Selector icon to open the Open window through which you can select a map image and associate it with the location. Click the Eraser icon to clear the field. Click the Preview button to view the associated map.

Depending on whether or not an image is assigned, the label changes from "No image assigned" to "Image assigned".

Details

Postal Address An optional field for entering the address of the location. A string of up to 80 characters.

Location Details An optional field for entering a description of the location. A string of up to 80 characters.

Parameter Description

Country-City Country and city access codes.

Example: 049-071

Latitude-Longitude Latitude and longitude.

Example: 38.57N, 121.47W

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 99

Page 111: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

4.5.8 The Logical Location Map

The logical location map provides s a topology view of the network, displaying for each location all

associated devices and sub-locations.

In the Equipment Manager, select a single device and click on the Open Map action, or:

In the Active Events Manager, select a single entry and click on the Open Map action, or:

In the Event History Manager, select a single entry and click on the Open Map action.

The location map window for the relevant location will open, displaying its sub-locations and the

equipment associated with it.

Area Code-Prefix Area code and prefix.

Example: 916-939

Vertical-Horizontal Vertical / horizontal coordinates, developed by Bell Systems.

INFORMATION

Coordinates type and coordinates values are not used for displaying the location in geographic maps. They are available for informational purposes only.

To open the logical location map:

INFORMATION

The Open Map action is available only if a location is assigned to the relevant device.

In the Local CRAFT Utility, the map displays only the licensed equipment.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 100

Page 112: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

The background color of each device icon presented in the map is according to the alarm state of the

device:

Critical: Red

Major: Orange

Minor: Yellow

Warning: Blue

Indeterminate: Purple

Other: Grey

Cleared: Green

The background color of each location’s icon is according to the alarm state of the device with highest

alarm severity among all relevant devices.

The following operations are available:

Figure 4-14: Location Map

AlvariSTAR User Manual 101

Page 113: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

Click on the Up one level button, or right-click anywhere on the map view (except on an icon) and

select the Up one level option to open the map for the parent location. The Up one level action is

disabled if there is no parent location for the currently displayed location.

Place the mouse over a location icon to view a bubble with its details (Name and Type).

Place the mouse over a device icon to view a bubble with its details (Name, Type, Running SW

Version, IP Address, Location, Management State and Serial Number).

Right-click on a location icon and select the Drill down option, or double-click on the location icon, to

display the map for the selected location.

Right-click on a device icon to display the following options:

» Configure: Opens a BTS the configuration manager for the selected device, enabling full

configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS

Number>. Not available if the Operational State of the selected device is Disabled.

» Cut Through: Opens a Telnet session to the selected device in a separate window. Not available if

the Operational State of the selected device is other than Enabled.

» Open alarms: Opens the Open Alarms window, enabling to view the active alarms (if any)

associated with the selected device.

You can drag-and-drop the location and device icons to re-arrange the way they are displayed. Click

on the Save button to save the modified view.

INFORMATION

You can also double-click on a device icon to open the BTS configuration manager for the selected device.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 102

Page 114: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 4 - Configuration OperationsThe Locations ManagerChapter 4 - Configuration Operations The Locations Manager

4.5.9 The Select location Window

The Select location window is opened whenever there is a need to assign a location to one or several

specific entities, such as when creating/editing a Network Settings entry in the Discovery Manager, when

using the Edit Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager for updating the parameters of one or

several devices or when using the Location option in either the Event Template Editor or the NBI Policy

Editor.

All available locations are displayed using hierarchy view.

Use the hide/expose sign to the left of each location with sub-locations to hide/expose all relevant

sub-locations.

You can use the free-text Search text box in the Find Locations panel together with the Next and

Previous buttons to find locations that include the defined search string anywhere in their name.

Select a single location and click Apply to assign the location to the relevant entity/entities.

Figure 4-15: Select location

AlvariSTAR User Manual 103

Page 115: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - Events

In This Chapter:

“Event History Manager” on page 105

“NBI Events Forwarding Manager” on page 116

“NBI Policy Manager” on page 121

“Event Templates Manager” on page 128

“Script Commands Manager” on page 141

Page 116: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

5.1 Event History Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Event History Manager

Event History Main Area

Event Details

Event History Actions Panel

Find Events Panel

5.1.1 Introduction to the Event History Manager

The Event History manager displays details of all events that occurred in the system

Select Events> Event History from the Main Menu. The Event History tab is added to the tabs ribbon and

the Event History Manager screen is displayed:

5.1.2 Event History Main Area

This section includes:

Event History Table

Event Types

To open the Event History Manager:

Figure 5-1: The Event History Manager Screen

AlvariSTAR User Manual 105

Page 117: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

Event Severity

5.1.2.1 Event History Table

The Event History Main Area comprises a table that by default includes all the events that were received

from devices that can be managed by the specific user. The display is updated whenever an alarm is

received or cleared.

To freeze the display such that the display of incoming events is suppressed, click on the Freeze button

located above the table in the top right corner of the Main Area. When in Freeze mode, the button label

changes to Unfreeze, enabling to return to the default state of displaying incoming events on the fly.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the information displayed for each active event includes:

Figure 5-2: The Event History Table

Parameter Description

Event Severity Icon An event icon whose color is according to event severity:

Critical: Red

Major: Orange

Minor: Yellow

Warning: Blue

Indeterminate: Purple

Other: Grey

Cleared: Green

A sign on the right side of the event icon indicates an event that was cleared (either manually by the user or automatically by the system).

The Icon column has a fixed width and it cannot be moved or deleted.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 106

Page 118: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

Additional optional information columns are:

5.1.2.2 Event Types

The possible Event Types are:

Severity The severity of the event. Refer to “Event Severity” on page 108.

Event Category The category classification of the event. The event categories are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.

Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing the event (see “Event Templates Manager” on page 128).

Receive Time The time and date of receiving the event.

Event Time The time and date of the event occurrence.

IP Address The IP address of the equipment reporting this event.

Equipment Type The type of equipment reporting this event.

Equipment The name of the equipment reporting this event, accompanied by the BTS Number.

Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.

Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.

Event Type The classification type of the event. Available event types vary according to the event category. For more details see “Event Types” on page 107.

Cleared By The user who manually cleared the event (if applicable).

Clear Time The date and time at which the event was manually cleared. (if applicable).

Parameter Description

Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).

Ack Time The date and time the event was acknowledged (if applicable).

Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.

Location The location assigned to the equipment reporting the event (if any).

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 107

Page 119: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

5.1.2.3 Event Severity

The management system is delivered with a set of default event severity definitions, each with its own

default color.

The default severity definitions are:

Event Category Event Type

Alarm Other

Communications Alarm

Quality of Service Alarm

Processing Error Alarm

Equipment Alarm

Environmental Alarm

Integrity Violation

Operational Violation

Physical Violation

Security Violation

Time Domain Violation

State Change State Or Status Change

System Event System Event

Software Download

Backup Configuration File

Maintenance

Telnet Session

Config Change Config Change

Entity Added

Entity Changed

Entity Removed

Parameter Description

Critical (red) A service-halting condition occurs, requiring immediate corrective action. The equipment is completely out of service and you must restore its capability.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 108

Page 120: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

All the above severities are applicable only for Alarm events. The severity for all events belonging to

other event categories is always Other (grey), meaning no severity.

The Severity of events received from managed devices is according to the severity level defined in the

device for each specific event.

5.1.3 Event Details

The Event Details section is applicable only for s single selected event and it includes the following tabs:

Events Details General Tab

Events Details Status Tab

Events Details Parameters Tab

Events Details Other Info Tab

Events Details Notes Tab

Major (orange) A service-affecting condition has developed and corrective action is required. There is severe degradation in the equipment’s capability and you must restore its full capability.

Minor (yellow) A non-service-affecting fault condition exists and corrective action should be taken in order to prevent a more serious fault. The detected event condition is not currently degrading the capacity of the equipment.

Warning (blue) A potential or impending service-affecting fault could occur, and no significant effects have yet been felt. Action should be taken to further diagnose and correct the problem to prevent it from becoming a more serious service-affecting fault. The detected event condition does not currently pose a problem, but may degrade the capacity of the equipment if you do not take corrective action.

Indeterminate (purple) Indicates an event for which the perceived severity is uncertain, due to any cause.

Cleared (green) The problem has been corrected.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 109

Page 121: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

5.1.3.1 Events Details General Tab

The General tab displays the following details for the selected event:

Figure 5-3: Event Details General Tab

Parameter Description

Equipment Name The name of the equipment.

Equipment Type The type of equipment.

Managed Object The managed object (MO) physical or logical component in the equipment associated with the event.

Alias The name of the physical or logical component/sub-component in the equipment associated with the event.

Location Name The location assigned to the equipment.

Event Category The category classification of the event. The event categories are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.

Event Type The classification type of the event. Event types vary according to the event category. For details refer to “Event Types” on page 107.

Event Name The name of the event. If the name is blank when received by the application, the event takes the name of the event template used for processing.

Event Description An optional text description of the event as defined in the related event template.

Event Severity The severity of the event.

Object Severity The event severity of the managed object associated with the event.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 110

Page 122: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

5.1.3.2 Events Details Status Tab

The Status tab displays the following details for the selected event:

5.1.3.3 Events Details Parameters Tab

The Parameters tab displays the following details for the selected event:

Figure 5-4: Event Details Status Tab

Parameter Description

Last Update Time The date and time at which the last update of the event was received.

Receive Time The date and time at which the event was received.

Event Time The date and time at which the event actually occurred.

Ack Time The date and time at which event was acknowledged (if applicable).

Acked By The user who acknowledged the event (if applicable).

Clear Time The date and time that the event was cleared (if applicable).

Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).

Figure 5-5: Event Details Parameters Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 111

Page 123: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

5.1.3.4 Events Details Other Info Tab

The Other Info tab displays the following details for the selected event:

Parameter Description

Event Severity The severity of the event.

Object Severity The severity of the object associated with the event.

Probable Cause The probable cause of the event.

Specific Problem The specific problem that caused the event.

Cleared By The user who cleared the event (if applicable).

Clear Time The date and time at which the event was cleared (if applicable).

Clear Cause The reason the event was cleared (if applicable).

Figure 5-6: Event Details Other Info Tab

Parameter Description

Protocol The protocol used for the event. The current version supports SNMP only.

Source IP Address The IP address of the equipment that sent the event.

SNMP Version The number of SNMP version used by the equipment.

Generic Trap The generic trap code. It indicates an enterprise specific trap. Possible values: 0,1,2,3,4,6

Specific Trap The specific trap code as defined in the MIB, used only if Generic trap is 6.

Enterprise OID The SNMP trap Object Identification number.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 112

Page 124: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

In addition, a table that contains all trap attributes together their OID and Value is displayed at the

bottom.

5.1.3.5 Events Details Notes Tab

The Notes tab displays the following details for the selected event

5.1.4 Event History Actions Panel

The Event History Actions panel includes the following options

System Up Time Up time of the equipment.

Figure 5-7: Event Details Notes Tab

Parameter Description

Event Advisor Displays a text description of the event and sometimes proposes a remedy. For example, “The device has received an improperly authorized protocol message. The message has been discarded.” The default message displayed in the Advisor page comes from the trap’s MIB, but the message can be edited in the Event Template Editor Behavior page (see “Behavior Tab” on page 137). The Advisor message is the default message for any e-mails sent about the event.

Proposed Repair Actions The proposed remedy for the event. The remedy comes from the trap’s MIB.

General Notes Applicable only for an event for which a General Note was defined in the Active Events manager using the Event Note action. A note entered by a user providing additional information on the specific event instance.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 113

Page 125: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

5.1.5 Find Events Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is performed on Equipment column.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Severity: Available options include all possible severities. Each severity will be accompanied by (X/Y),

where X is the number of currently displayed (filtered using all possible search/filter options) events

with the relevant severity, and Y is the current total number of events with the relevant severity in the

database. Multiple selection of different Severities is supported.

Acknowledged: Enabling to display only acknowledged events. Acknowledge events are alarm events

acknowledged in the Active Events manager.

Time Before: Enabling to display only events received not later than a certain time ago. Available

options include 1 hour, 6 hours, 12 hours, 1 day, 1 week, 1 month.

Equipment Type: Available options include all possible equipment types that are supported by the

currently installed Device Drivers, plus the NMS equipment. Multiple selection is supported.

Option Action

Configure Opens a BTS configuration manager for the relevant device, enabling full configuration management capabilities. The name of the newly opened tab is BTS <BTS Number>. Not available if two or more events are selected. The BTS configuration manager will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.

Cut Through Opens a Telnet session to the relevant device in a separate window. Not available if two or more events are selected. A Telnet session will not be opened if the Operational State of the relevant device is Disabled.

Open Location Available only for a single selected event. Opens the logical map for the location of the relevant device (provided it has an assigned location). For details refer to “The Logical Location Map” on page 100.

Export Exports the selected event(s) and creates a Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected event(s) are exported, including columns that are currently hidden.

Click to open the Export Events window, browse to the desired location on the client file-system, enter the File Name, and click Export to export the event(s).

Print Preview Displays a preview of the current page before printing. See details in Print below.

Print Prints the entire current page, including columns that are currently hidden.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 114

Page 126: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent History ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event History Manager

Managed Object Type: Available option include all MO Types relevant to the selected Equipment

Type(s). Multiple selection is supported.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Equipment (Name)

Equipment Number (BTS Number, added to equipment name in Equipment column)

IP Address

Event Category

Event Type

AlvariSTAR User Manual 115

Page 127: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager

5.2 NBI Events Forwarding Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the NBI Events Forwarding Manager

NBI Events Forwarding Main Area

NBI Events Forwarding Details Panels

NBI Events Forwarding Actions Panel

Find NBI Events Forwarding Panel

The NBI Editor

5.2.1 Introduction to the NBI Events Forwarding Manager

The NBI (North Bound Interface) Events Forwarding manager provides management of the North Bound

Interface that allows connecting to other management systems and effectively forwarding specific (or

all) traps to these systems.

Select Events> NBI Events Forwarding from the Main Menu. The NBI Events Forwarding tab is added to

the tabs ribbon and the NBI Events Forwarding Manager screen is displayed.

The NBI Events Forwarding Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

INFORMATION

Refer also to “NBI Notifications” on page 236 for details on configuring general NBI Notifications parameters common to all NBI Event Forwarding instances.

To open the NBI Events Forwarding Manager:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 116

Page 128: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager

5.2.2 NBI Events Forwarding Main Area

The NBI Events Forwarding grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently

configured NBI Events Forwarding instances.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each instance includes:

Figure 5-8: The NBI Events Forwarding Table

Parameter Description

Name The name of the NBI Events Forwarding instance.

Description A description of the NBI Events Forwarding instance.

IP Address The IP address of the higher hierarchy manager to which relevant events should be forwarded.

Protocol The protocol use for communication with the higher hierarchy manager (SNMPv1, SNMPv2c, SNMPv3).

Event Forwarding The NPI event forwarding status (Enabled/Disabled).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 117

Page 129: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager

5.2.3 NBI Events Forwarding Details Panels

The NBI Events Forwarding Details section is applicable only for single selected NBI Events Forwarding

instance and it includes the same parameters that are available in the Main area, plus the SNMP Trap

Port (the destination port for traps forwarded from the management system).

5.2.4 NBI Events Forwarding Actions Panel

The NBI Events Forwarding Actions panel includes the following options:

5.2.5 Find NBI Events Forwarding Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to“Find Panel” on page 12.

Figure 5-9: NBI Events Forwarding Details

Option Action

New Adds a new NBI Events Forwarding instance to the database. Opens the NBI Events Forwarding Editor, allowing to define properties of the NBI Events Forwarding instance to be created. For more details, see “The NBI Editor” on page 119.

Edit Available only for a single selected NBI Events Forwarding instance. Opens the NBI Events Forwarding Editor for the selected instance, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The NBI Editor” on page 119.

Delete Deletes the selected NBI Events Forwarding instance(s) from the database.

Policy Opens the Select Policy window (see “The NBI Policy Selector Window” on page 120), enabling to associate an NBI Policy with the NBI Events Forwarding instance. An NBI Policy defines the event(s) to be forwarded by the NBI Events Forwarding. For more details see “NBI Policy Manager” on page 121.

Only one policy may be assigned to an NBI Events Forwarding instance. Assigning a new policy will remove a previously assigned policy.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 118

Page 130: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager

Simple Search is performed on Name and Description columns.

Protocol (including Version) is available as a Pre-Defined Filter. Multiple selection is supported.

The Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

IP Address

Name

Description

5.2.6 The NBI Editor

The NBI Editor enables defining a new NBI Events Forwarding instance or editing an existing one. It

includes the following parameters:

Figure 5-10: NBI Editor

Parameter Description

Name The unique name for the northbound interface. 1 to 32 characters.

Description An optional description of the Event Forwarding NBI interface. 0 to 100 characters.

Enable Check to enable trap forwarding on the interface. The default is checked (enabled).

IP Address The IP address of the remote host to which the traps will be forwarded.

Protocol In the current release the only SNMP protocol is supported.

SNMP Parameters

Version The SNMP version. Possible values are: v1, v2c or v3.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 119

Page 131: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Events Forwarding ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Events Forwarding Manager

5.2.7 The NBI Policy Selector Window

The NBI Policy Selector window displays details (Name and Description) of currently available NBI Policies.

For details refer to “NBI Policy Manager” on page 121. You can use the Advanced Filtering option in the

Find Policy panel to perform a search based on Name.

Select the policy you want to assign to the NBI Events Forwarding instance and click Apply.

Trap Port The port number to use to communicate with the system. The default is 162.

Figure 5-11: NBI Policy Selector

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 120

Page 132: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

5.3 NBI Policy Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the NBI Policy Manager

NBI Policy Main Area

NBI Policy Actions Panel

Find Policy Panel

The NBI Policy Editor

5.3.1 Introduction to the NBI Policy Manager

An NBI Policy defines event(s) to be forwarded by an NBI Event Forwarding interface to which the NBI

Policy is assigned. The NBI Policy manager provides management of the NBI Policies in the database.

Select Events> NBI Policy from the Main Menu. The NBI Policy tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the

NBI Policy Manager screen is displayed.

5.3.2 NBI Policy Main Area

The NBI Policy grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured NBI

Policies.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each instance includes:

The NBI Policy Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

To open the NBI Policy Manager:

Figure 5-12: The NBI Policy Table

AlvariSTAR User Manual 121

Page 133: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

5.3.3 NBI Policy Actions Panel

The NBI Policy Actions panel includes the following options:

5.3.4 Find Policy Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

Only the Advanced Filter option is available, enabling filtering based on the Name criterion:

5.3.5 The NBI Policy Editor

The NBI Policy Editor enables defining a new NBI Policy or editing an existing Policy. After completing

definition/changes, click on the OK button to apply the new configuration.

The NBI Policy Editor comprises two tabs:

General Tab

Filter Tab

5.3.5.1 General Tab

In the General tab, you can configure general information on the policy.

Parameter Description

Name The name of the NBI Policy.

Description A description of the NBI Policy.

Option Action

New Adds a new NBI Policy to the database. Opens the NBI Policy Editor, allowing to define properties of the NBI Policy to be created. For more details, see “The NBI Policy Editor” on page 122.

Edit Available only for a single selected NBI Policy. Opens the NBI Policy Editor for the selected policy, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The NBI Policy Editor” on page 122.

Delete Deletes the selected NBI Policy/Policies from the database.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 122

Page 134: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

The General tab includes the following parameters:

5.3.5.2 Filter Tab

The Filter tab enables defining the event(s) associated with the NBI policy. These events will be forwarded

by an NBI Events Forwarding instance using the policy.

Selection fields in the Filter tab enables selection of one or multiple relevant entities.

Use the Open Selector icon to open the relevant selector window displaying all available options (in most

selection fields available options depend on previously selected options in other fields). You can use the

traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. Click Select to confirm your

selection.

Select one or several previously selected entities and click on the Eraser icon to remove these entities

from the list of selected entities. You can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click

selection/de-selection methods.

The Filter tab includes 3 pages:

Figure 5-13: NBI Policy Editor - General Tab

Parameter Description

Name The name of the NBI policy. 1 to 32 characters.

Description An optional description of the policy. 0 to 100 characters.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 123

Page 135: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

Filter Tab - NE Page

Filter Tab - Topology Page

Filter Tab - Event Page

5.3.5.2.1 Filter Tab - NE Page

The NE page enables selection of specific events. These can be either SNMP generic traps (common to all

network elements) or specific traps (applicable only for a specific device family/equipment type). The NE

page enables also selection of specific network elements/managed objects:

Figure 5-14: NBI Policy Editor - Filter Tab, NE Page

Parameter Description

Network Element Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Network Element Type Selector enabling selection of the network element type(s) to be included. The selection list includes all network elements supported by installed device drivers and the NMS itself.

Managed Object Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Managed Object Type Selector enabling selection of the managed object type(s) to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 124

Page 136: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

5.3.5.2.2 Filter Tab - Topology Page

The Topology page enables optional selection of specific locations and/or network elements. Only events

sent from network elements that meet the specified criteria will be included:

Managed Object Instance Enter specific managed object instance number. Only traps from these specific managed object instance will be included. Available only if the Managed Object Type field contains a single entity.

Managed Object Alias The Alias of a managed object instance.

Event Name Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Trap Name/OID Selector Selector enabling selection of trap(s) to be included. Available options include SNMP Generic traps plus specific traps according to currently selected entities in the Network Element Type and Managed Object Type fields.

Use the hide/expose (-/+) control next to each traps group name to hide/expose traps in the group. You can use the Find option to search for specific traps: Enter a search string in the Find field and use the Find Next/Find Previous buttons to find visible traps whose name contains the search string.

Figure 5-15: NBI Policy Editor - Filter Tab, Topology Page

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 125

Page 137: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

5.3.5.2.3 Filter Tab - Event Page

The NE and Topology pages enables selection of specific events. The Event page enables adding to

specific selected events also specific Event Categories/Event Types. If selected Event Categories include

Alarm events, it also enables selection of specific Alarm Severities.

Parameter Description

Locations You can use the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) to select specific location(s) to be included.

Network Elements You can use the Select Equipment window (see “The Equipment Selector Window” on page 61) to select specific network elements to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field (in the NE page). This option is available only if the list of selected entities in the Network Element Type field includes at least one Network Element Type other than NMS.

Figure 5-16: NBI Policy Editor - Filter Tab, Event Page

Parameter Description

Event Category Select the category classification of the event. Possible values are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 126

Page 138: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsNBI Policy ManagerChapter 5 - Events NBI Policy Manager

Event Type Select the classification type of the event. The possible options depend on the currently selected Event Categories.

Severity Applicable only if the list of selected Event Categories includes Alarm events. Check the boxes for inclusion of alarms with selected severities. For more information on alarm severity see “Event Severity” on page 66.

User Classifier Select the User Classifier. Possible values: None (to include all relevant events according to other selections), Service Affecting (to include only relevant events classified as Service Affecting).

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 127

Page 139: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4 Event Templates Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Event Templates Manager

Event Templates Main Area

Event Templates Details Panels

Event Templates Actions Panel

Find Event Templates Panel

The Event Template Editor

The Command Selector Window

5.4.1 Introduction to the Event Templates Manager

Event Templates determine how the system processes different traps sent by managed network objects.

Event templates match each incoming message with specific actions. The system is supplied with default

templates for NMS traps and for device family traps according to the installed Device Driver(s).

Select Events> Event Templates from the Main Menu. The Event Templates tab is added to the tabs

ribbon and the Event Templates Manager screen is displayed.

5.4.2 Event Templates Main Area

To open the Event Templates Manager:

Figure 5-17: The Event Templates Table

AlvariSTAR User Manual 128

Page 140: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

The Event Templates grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the Event Templates available

in the database.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each template includes:

5.4.3 Event Templates Details Panels

The Event Template Details Panel includes the following tabs for a single selected template:

Event Template Details General Tab

Event Template Details Filter Tab

Event Template Details Behavior Tab

Parameter Description

Name The name of the template.

Description A description of the template.

Owner The user who created the template. The default creator for default templates is SYSTEM.

Creation Date The template’s date of creation. The default creation date for default templates is the date and time of installing the management system.

Priority The template’s priority. The template priority determines which template should be used if the event matches more than one template. The smaller the number defining a template’s priority, the higher the priority the template is.

If the event matches two or more templates with the same priority, the first created template will be used.

If there is a template defined for specific network elements (defined in the Topology page) and other “general” template(s) (not defined for specific network elements), all having the same priority, the “specific network element” template will be used for relevant event(s) sent from the specific network elements.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 129

Page 141: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.3.1 Event Template Details General Tab

The General tab includes the same information as in the main area (see “Event Templates Main Area” on

page 128).

5.4.3.2 Event Template Details Filter Tab

The Filter tab includes all the Filter configuration details of the template (see “Filter Tab” on page 133).

Figure 5-18: Event Templates Details General Tab

Figure 5-19: Event Templates Details Filter Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 130

Page 142: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.3.3 Event Template Details Behavior Tab

The Filter tab includes all the Behavior configuration details of the template (see “Behavior Tab” on

page 137).

5.4.4 Event Templates Actions Panel

The Event Templates Actions panel includes the following options:

5.4.5 Find Event Templates Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

Simple search is performed on the Name and Description columns.

The Owner and Priority parameters are available as a Pre-Defined Filtering options. Multiple selection is

supported for both.

Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

Description

Name

Figure 5-20: Event Templates Details Behavior Tab

Option Action

New Adds a new Event Template to the database. Opens the Event Template Editor, allowing to define properties of the Event Template be created. For more details, see“The Event Template Editor” on page 132.

Edit Available only for a single selected template. Opens the Event Template Editor for the selected template, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The Event Template Editor” on page 132.

Delete Deletes the selected Event Template(s) from the database. Only the Owner of a template can delete it.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 131

Page 143: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

Creation Date

5.4.6 The Event Template Editor

The Event Template Editor enables defining a new event templates or editing an existing event template.

After completing definition/changes, click on the OK button to apply the new configuration.

The Event Template Editor comprises three tabs:

General Tab

Filter Tab

Behavior Tab

5.4.6.1 General Tab

In the General tab, you can configure general parameters of the template.

The General tab includes the following parameters:

Figure 5-21: Event Template Editor - General Tab

Parameter Description

Name The name of the template. 1 to 128 characters.

Description An optional description of the template. 0 to 250 characters.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 132

Page 144: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.6.2 Filter Tab

The Filter tab enables defining the event(s) associated with the event template.

Selection fields in the Filter tab enables selection of one or multiple relevant entities.

Use the Open Selector icon to open the relevant selector window displaying all available options (in most

selection fields available options depend on previously selected options in other fields). You can use the

traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. Click Select to confirm your

selection.

Select one or several previously selected entities and click on the Eraser icon to remove these entities

from the list of selected entities. You can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click

selection/de-selection methods.

The Filter tab includes 3 pages:

Filter Tab - NE Page

Filter Tab - Topology Page

Filter Tab - Event Page

Priority The template’s priority. A number in the range from 1 (the default) to 99999.

The template priority determines which template should be used if the event matches more than one template. The smaller the number defining a template’s priority, the higher the priority the template is.

If the event matches two or more templates with the same priority, the first created template will be used.

If there is a template defined for specific network elements (defined in the Topology page) and other “general” template(s) (not defined for specific network elements), all having the same priority, the “specific network element” template will be used for relevant event(s) sent from the specific network elements.

Owner Read-only. When editing an existing template - the user who created the template. For a new template - the name of the logged in user.

Creation Date Read-only. The date and time of template’s creation. For a new template this is the current date and time.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 133

Page 145: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.6.2.1 Filter Tab - NE Page

The NE page enables selection of specific events. These can be either SNMP generic traps (common to all

network elements) or specific traps (applicable only for a specific device family/equipment type). The NE

page enables also selection of specific network elements/managed objects:

Figure 5-22: Event Template Editor - Filter Tab, NE Page

Parameter Description

Network Element Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Network Element Type Selector enabling selection of the network element type(s) to be included. The selection list includes all network elements supported by installed device drivers and the NMS itself.

Managed Object Type Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Managed Object Type Selector enabling selection of the managed object type(s) to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field.

Managed Object Instance Enter specific managed object instance number. Only traps from these specific managed object instance will be included. Available only if the Managed Object Type field contains a single entity.

Managed Object Alias The Alias of a managed object instance.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 134

Page 146: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.6.2.2 Filter Tab - Topology Page

The Topology page enables optional selection of specific locations and/or network elements. Only events

sent from network elements that meet the specified criteria will be included:

Event Name Click on the Open Selector icon to open the Trap Name/OID Selector Selector enabling selection of trap(s) to be included. Available options include SNMP Generic traps plus specific traps according to currently selected entities in the Network Element Type and Managed Object Type fields.

Use the hide/expose (-/+) control next to each traps group name to hide/expose traps in the group. You can use the Find option to search for specific traps: Enter a search string in the Find field and use the Find Next/Find Previous buttons to find visible traps whose name contains the search string.

Figure 5-23: Event Template Editor - Filter Tab, Topology Page

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 135

Page 147: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.6.2.3 Filter Tab - Event Page

The NE and Topology pages enables selection of specific events. The Event page enables adding to

specific selected events also specific Event Categories/Event Types. If selected Event Categories include

Alarm events, it also enables selection of specific Alarm Severities.

Parameter Description

Locations You can use the Select location window (see “The Select location Window” on page 103) to select specific location(s). If one or more locations are selected, only network elements from these locations can be included.

Network Elements You can use the Select Equipment window (see “The Equipment Selector Window” on page 61) to select specific network elements to be included. Available options depend on the currently selected entities in the Network Element Type field (in the NE page). This option is available only if the list of selected entities in the Network Element Type field includes at least one Network Element Type other than NMS.

Figure 5-24: Event Template Editor - Filter Tab, Event Page

AlvariSTAR User Manual 136

Page 148: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.6.3 Behavior Tab

The Behavior tab defines the actions to be executed upon receiving a matching event. It includes two

pages:

Actions Page

Email Page

5.4.6.3.1 Actions Page

Parameter Description

Event Category Select the category classification of the event. Possible values are: Alarm, State Change, System Event, Config Change.

Event Type Select the classification type of the event. The possible options depend on the currently selected Event Categories.

Severity Applicable only if the list of selected Event Categories includes Alarm events. Check the boxes for inclusion of alarms with selected severities. For more information on alarm severity see “Event Severity” on page 66.

User Classifier Select the User Classifier. Possible values: None (to include all relevant events according to other selections), Service Affecting (to include only relevant events classified as Service Affecting).

Figure 5-25: Event Template Editor - Behavior Tab, Actions Page

AlvariSTAR User Manual 137

Page 149: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

The Actions page contains the following parameters:

5.4.6.3.2 Email Page

Use the Email page to enter a message that appears in e-mails when the template is activated and define

a list of recipients to be notified (applicable only if email functions are available in the NMS server).

Parameter Description

Script Command Use this option to select the pre-configured external script command to be executed. Click the Open Selector icon to open the Command Selector window (see “The Command Selector Window” on page 140).

User Classifier Select the User Classifier. Possible values: None, Service Affecting

Alarm Severity Applicable only for Alarm events. Selects the severity level to be assigned to the alarm. Once the template is selected, before actually processing the alarm, this field overrides the severity of the alarm as it was received from the originating device. Possible values are: No Change (the default), Cleared, Indeterminate, Warning, Minor, Major, Critical.

Requires Acknowledge Check to require that the associated event is acknowledged. The default is not selected. If selected for a non-alarm event (severity Other), this event will be added to list of events that should be displayed in the Active Events manager (see “The Active Events Manager” on page 62).

Advisor Message Enter a text description of the event.

The Email page is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 138

Page 150: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

The Email page contains the following parameters:

Figure 5-26: Event Template Editor - Behavior Tab, Email Page

Parameter Description

Auto Send Email Check to automatically send a defined email message to the specified recipient(s) whenever the associated event occurs.

To Select the recipient for this email message from the list.

Subject Enter the subject line of the email message.

Message Enter an email message.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 139

Page 151: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsEvent Templates ManagerChapter 5 - Events Event Templates Manager

5.4.7 The Command Selector Window

The Command Selector window displays currently available script commands. For more details refer to

“Script Commands Manager” on page 141. You can use the Advanced Filtering option in the Find

Command panel to perform a search based on Name and/or Description.

Select the command you want to execute upon receiving a matching event and click Apply.

Figure 5-27: Command Selector

AlvariSTAR User Manual 140

Page 152: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager

5.5 Script Commands Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Script Commands Manager

Script Commands Main Area

Script Commands Details Panels

Script Commands Actions Panel

Find Scripts Panel

The Command Editor

5.5.1 Introduction to the Script Commands Manager

An Event Template may be configured to trigger automatic execution of a pre-prepared script (see

“Event Template Details Behavior Tab” on page 131). The Script Commands manager enables

management of such pre-prepared script commands.

Select Events> Script Commands from the Main Menu. The Script Commands tab is added to the tabs

ribbon and the Script Commands Manager screen is displayed.

5.5.2 Script Commands Main Area

The Script Commands grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently available

Script Commands.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each Script Command includes:

To open the Script Commands Manager:

Figure 5-28: The Script Commands Table

Parameter Description

Name The name of the Script Command.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 141

Page 153: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager

5.5.3 Script Commands Details Panels

The Script Command Details Panel includes the following details for a single selected command:

Command Name

Description

Command Line

Script Name

Script Path

For details on these parameters see “The Command Editor” on page 143.

5.5.4 Script Commands Actions Panel

The Script Commands Actions panel includes the following options:

5.5.5 Find Scripts Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

Description A description of the Script Command.

Figure 5-29: Script Commands Details

Option Action

New Adds a new Script Commands to the database. Opens the Command Editor, allowing to define properties of the Script Commands be created. For more details, see “The Command Editor” on page 143.

Edit Available only for a single selected Script Commands. Opens the Command Editor for the selected Script Commands, allowing to edit some of it’s properties. For more details, see “The Command Editor” on page 143.

Delete Deletes the selected Script Command(s) from the database.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 142

Page 154: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager

Only Advanced Filter is available and it includes the Name and Description criteria:

5.5.6 The Command Editor

The Command Editor includes the following fields:

Figure 5-30: The Command Editor

Parameter Description

Command Information

Command Name A unique text identifier.

Description A text description

Command Details

Script Name The name of the script to run

Script Path The location of the script.

Command Argument

Argument Option Enter a text value

Argument Type Possible values are: Constant, Event Property

Argument Value If Argument Type = Constant, this is a text field

If Argument Type = Event Property then select from a list of possible attributes

AlvariSTAR User Manual 143

Page 155: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 5 - EventsScript Commands ManagerChapter 5 - Events Script Commands Manager

After completing configuration of a new Command or changing an existing Command click OK to apply

the new configuration.

Text Qualifier Select whether this parameter needs double, single quotes, or no qualifier. When you select quotes, the parameter looks like this: -a “surrounded by quotes”.

Command Line This section of the screen displays the script command as you assemble it. Click the Add button on the right to assemble the complete script command. Added parameters always appear last on the list in this area, but you can use the arrow keys to re-arrange their order, and the Delete button to remove a selected parameter (but not the script). Delete All removes everything.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 144

Page 156: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS Services

In This Chapter:

“MS Manager” on page 146

“The MS Connection Maintenance Manager” on page 156

Page 157: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

6.1 MS Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the MS Manager

MS Main Area

MS Details Panels

MS Actions Panel

Find MS Panel

Switching to Map View for a selected MS

Editing MS Location Details

Notes on Available MS Information

6.1.1 Introduction to the MS Manager

The MS manager displays details of Mobile MSs in the network using information retrieved from relevant

management systems. It also enables several operations for a selected MS (subject to certain conditions),

such as displaying it on a a geographical map or opening in a separate window the StarACS or

StarQuality in the specific MS context.

To support full functionally of the MS manager both StarACS and StarQuality should be installed.

Select MS Services > MS from the Main Menu. The MS tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the MS

Manager is displayed.

To open the MS Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 146

Page 158: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

6.1.2 MS Main Area

The MS grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the subscriber units for whom relevant

information is available. Relevant information is gathered from StarQuality and StarACS (for Extreme

some information is available also from the management system’s own data base, gathered from the

serving BTS equipment). If no updated data related to a specific MS is gathered for a period of 24 hours,

this MS will be removed from the database. This aging mechanism will not be activated if both StarACS

and StarQuality has become unavailable.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each MS includes:

:

Figure 6-1: The MS Table

Parameter Description

MAC Address The MS’s MAC Address

Serial Number The MS’s Serial Number

Product Model The product model of the MS

Last Conn Date Last data and time at which the MS connected to the serving BS.

BS ID The BS ID of the BS currently serving the MS.

SW Version The MS’s running SW version

Lat/Long The latitude/longitude coordinates of the MS, if known. For details on getting MS’s latitude/longitude coordinates refer to “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151 and “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 147

Page 159: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

6.1.3 MS Details Panels

The MS Details section is applicable only for s single selected entry and it includes the following details:

MAC Address: The MS’s MAC Address

Model: The MS’s Model type (if available)

Status: connected or No data is available. For 4Motion/COMPACT the status will be No data is

available if StarQuality is not available. For Extreme the status will be No data is available if there is no

information for the MS in the management system’s database. Otherwise the status is connected.

6.1.4 MS Actions Panel

The MS Actions panel includes the following options that are available only for a single selected MS:

INFORMATION

For more details on displayed information under different conditions refer to

Figure 6-2: MS Details

Option Action

Operations

Show on Map Switch to map view (if applicable for the selected MS), showing the selected MS on the geographical map. For details refer to “Switching to Map View for a selected MS” on page 150.

Edit Opens the MS Edit location window (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151), enabling to modify unit’s location details. Applicable only for an MS that is managed by StarACS.

Links

Performance Available only for an MS that is monitored by StarQuality. Click the cut-through link to open in a separate window the StarQuality in the specific MS context.

Management Available only for an that is managed by StarACS. Click the cut-through link to open in a separate window the StarACS in the specific MS context.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 148

Page 160: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

6.1.5 Find MS Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

Simple Search enables searching for MS(s) with either a MAC Address or a Serial Number containing a

specified text string (case in-sensitive). Enter a complete MAC address/serial number to search for a

specific MS, or a partial MAC address/serial number string to search for MSs that the specified string is

included anywhere in their MAC address/serial number (for example, type E7-30 to search for all MSs

whose MAC address includes the string E7-30). Leave the text box empty to search for all MSs in the

database. Only MS(s) that meets this criterion (and, if applicable, criteria defined by other filtering

options) will be displayed. Click on the Find icon ( ) to initiate the search. Clear the text box to remove

the search criterion.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

MAC Address: specify a complete MAC address to search for a specific MS, or a partial address string

to search for MSs that the specified string is included anywhere in their MAC address (for

example-type E7-30 to search for all MSs whose MAC address includes the string E7-30). Leave the

text box empty to search for all MSs in the database.

Serial Number: Specify a complete Serial Number or a partial prefix string (for example-type 7053 to

search for all MSs whose serial number starts with 7053.

Model: Available options depend on Model types that exist in the database. Click on the drop-down

menu option on the right side to display all available options. Select a specific Model or All (the

default).

BS ID: Specify a complete BS ID or a partial prefix string (for example-type 130.131.30.14 to search

for all MSs served by any BS whose BS ID starts with 130.131.30.14).

The search strings are not case-sensitive.

The results include only “connected” MSs:

4Motion/COMPACT: MSs available in the database of StarQuality that had at least one collection in

the last 24 hours (including MSs not available in the database of StarACS).

Extreme: MSs available in the database of AlvariSTAR (including MSs not available in the database of

StarACS).

In addition, the Search Type option enables selecting one of the following pre-defined searches:

Table 6-1: MS Pre-Defined Search

Name Description

MSs Registered Since MSs registered since a certain date (see below instructions for date definition)

MSs Rebooted Since MSs rebooted since a certain date (see below instructions for date definition)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 149

Page 161: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

For “Since” searches, a Date definition text box is opened, allowing to specify relevant date. The default

date is the current date. Specify a different date using one of the following options:

Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date).

Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic

display.

6.1.6 Switching to Map View for a selected MS

The Show on Map feature is applicable only for users that are assigned the Map Users User Profile.

Click on the Show On Map cut-through link to view the MS’s location on a map. This is applicable only

if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:

The MS is served by a BTS with known coordinates.

The geolocation information (Latitude/Longitude) of the MS is stored in the system (see “Editing MS

Location Details” on page 151 and “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240).

The Latitude/Longitude information is not available, but the address information of the MS is stored

in the system (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151 and “MS Coordinates Import” on

MSs Not Updated Since MSs not updated since a certain date (see below instructions for date definition)

MSs without Lat/Long MSs with address information and without latitude/longitude information.The resulting list contains MSs that were loaded using the MS Coordinates Import utility (see “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240) that have address information and do not have complete latitude and longitude information. The list includes also MSs that were loaded with address information and later the address information was deleted either by loading an “ADDR” MSs file with null information for the MS or through the MS Edit Location feature (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151).

MSs without Address MSs with latitude/longitude information and without address information. The resulting list contains MSs that were loaded using the MS Coordinates Import utility (see “MS Coordinates Import” on page 240) that have latitude and longitude information and do not have complete address information. The list includes also MSs that were loaded with latitude/longitude information and later the latitude/longitude information was deleted either by loading a “LATLONG” MSs file with null information for the MS or through the MS Edit Location feature (see “Editing MS Location Details” on page 151).

Table 6-1: MS Pre-Defined Search

Name Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 150

Page 162: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

page 240) and the system can find the geolocation based on this address using Bing Maps

Geolocation Services (see more details below).

The system displays messages indicating missing information.

If only the address of the MS is known, the system tries finding its coordinates using Bing Maps

Geolocation Services:

If the geolocation service fails, the system notifies the user about the existence of an address which

cannot be mapped to latitude/longitude coordinates, and displays the MS in the center of the serving

sector.

If the geolocation services returned one result, the latitude/longitude coordinates are stored and the

MS is displayed in its geolocation. This MS no longer is available in the MSs without Lat/Long search

results.

If the geolocation services returned more than one result, a list of options are presented to the user.

The latitude/longitude coordinates of the selected location are stored and the MS is displayed in the

selected geolocation. This MS no longer is available in the MSs without Lat/Long search results.

The system displays for several seconds a blinking MS icon at its geolocation (if available). Otherwise, the

icon is displayed at the center of the serving sector. The contour of the serving sector also blinks together

with the MS’s icon.

For more details on Map View refer to “Map View” on page 31.

6.1.7 Editing MS Location Details

Click on the Edit action link of an MS entry to open the Edit Location window.

The Edit Location window enables updating/adding/deleting geolocation (Latitude, Longitude) and/or

Address (Address, City, Country) information for the MS.

Figure 6-3: Edit Location

AlvariSTAR User Manual 151

Page 163: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

Note that even if you delete all location information for an MS it remains in the MSs without

Address/MSs without Lat/Long search results. MSs are removed from these lists only if both address and

geolocation details exist (either through manual editing or through geolocating an address using Bing

Maps Geolocation Services).

Click OK to store the changes in the management system.

Click Cancel to cancel the changes.

If only Address information is defined than after clicking OK the address information will be stored in

the management system, a geolocation task for the specified address will be initiated and the system

will switch to Map View:

If the geolocation service returned one result, the Latitude and Longitude information are updated

accordingly and the coordinates are stored in the management system. The found geolocation will be

indicated on the map. The MS is no longer included in search results for MSs without Address/MSs

without Lat/Long.

If the geolocation service returned more than one results, you are presented by a list of options. After

selecting the preferred option, the selected geolocation will be indicated on the map. However, the

coordinates of the selected option are not stored in the management system.

If the geolocation service did not return any result, you receive a message indicating the failure to

geolocate the specified address.

6.1.8 Notes on Available MS Information

Information for Extreme MSs is collected from AlvariSTAR.

Information for 4Motion and COMPACT is collected from StarQuality and StarACS.

To present data in the MS table the system collects all data from AlvariSTAR, StarQuality and StarACS

and then merges it.

The status of “connected” for an MS is taken from AlvariSTAR (for MSs associated to Extreme

equipment) or from StarQuality (for MSs associated to 4Motion/COMPACT equipment).

The MS information received from AlvariSTAR and StarQuality is an association pair (MAC, BS ID). The

MAC is the MAC Address of the MS and BS ID is the serving BS ID.

If StarACS is installed, more information on the MS is available (S/N, Product Model, etc) in addition to

MAC and BS ID details.

When merging data from all 3 sources, the merged data will contain the BS ID from AlvariSTAR or

StarQuality (if available) and not from StarACS, That is because AlvariSTAR and StarQuality has more

recent and reliable data than StarACS.

So the main principles are:

All data received from AlvariSTAR/StarQuality is data about connected MSs

All data about MSs received from AlvariSTAR/StarQuality has priority over data received from StarACS

AlvariSTAR User Manual 152

Page 164: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

All data about MSs received from AlvariSTAR has priority over StarQuality data. If we get a pair

(MAC,BS ID) from AlvariSTAR and a pair (MAC,BS ID) from StarQuality with the same MAC but with

different BS IDs, the final BS ID will be that received from AlvariSTAR

The steps in the process of preparing the final data will be:

1 Get data from AlvariSTAR

2 Get data from StarQuality

3 Get data from StarACS

4 Merge data from all available sources

Merging of data is made in a few steps as described below, depending on available data sources and

which filters are used:

A StarACS is not available, StarQuality is not available:

» Merged/final data will contain AlvariSTAR data. The MS status will be connected. Only info

available is MAC and BS ID.

» If there is no data in AlvariSTAR, final results will contain no data.

B StarACS is not available, StarQuality is available:

» Merged/final data will contain:

◊ AlvariSTAR Data - Extreme MSs

◊ StarQuality Data - 4Motion/COMPACT MSs

Only info available will be MAC and BS ID.

C StarACS is available, StarQuality is available:

1 No Advanced Filtering:

◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains all data received from AlvariSTAR

◊ StarQuality Data - contains all data received from StarQuality

◊ StarACS Data - contains all data received from StarACS

Merged Data (final data) contains:

◊ All MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in AlvariSTAR Data or StarQuality Data. If necessary,

BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from AlvariSTAR Data (first priority) or

StarQuality Data (second priority)

◊ All MSs in StarQuality Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra StarQuality MSs)

◊ All MSs in AlvariSTAR Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra AlvariSTAR MSs)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 153

Page 165: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

2 Filter contains BS ID mask:

◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains data from AlvariSTAR filtered by BS ID mask

◊ StarQuality Data - contains data from StarQuality filtered by BS ID mask

◊ StarACS Data - contains all data from StarACS, ignoring BS ID mask

Merged Data (final data) contains:

◊ All MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in StarQuality Data or AlvariSTAR Data

◊ All MSs in StarQuality Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra StarQuality MSs)

◊ All MSs in AlvariSTAR Data with MACs not in StarACS Data. (extra AlvariSTAR MSs)

3 Filter contains BS ID masking addition to Product Model and/or Serial Number mask:

◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains data from AlvariSTAR filtered by BS ID mask

◊ StarQuality Data - contains data from StarQuality filtered by BS ID mask

◊ StarACS Data - contains all data from StarACS filtered by Product Model and/or Serial

Number mask

Merged Data (final data) contains all MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in StarQuality Data

and/or AlvariSTAR Data. If necessary, BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from

AlvariSTAR Data (first priority) or StarQuality Data (second priority).

4 Filter contains Product Model and/or Serial Number mask:

◊ AlvariSTAR Data - contains all data from AlvariSTAR

◊ StarQuality Data - contains all data from StarQuality

◊ StarACS Data - contains all data from StarACS filtered by Product Model and/or Serial

Number mask

Merged Data (final data) contains all MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in StarQuality Data

and/or AlvariSTAR Data. If necessary, BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from

AlvariSTAR Data (first priority) or StarQuality Data (second priority).

D StarACS is available, StarQuality is not available:

1 If there is at least 1 Extreme equipment discovered in AlvariSTAR: Data is merged like in step C)

above, with the exception that only that there is no StarQuality Data. However, if an MS in

StarACS Data has a MAC that is not in AlvariSTAR Data, but has a BS ID that is in any of the

MAC,BSID pairs that exist in AlvariSTAR Data, this MS is not added to merged/final data.

2 If there is no Extreme equipment discovered in AlvariSTAR: Merged data (final data) is the filtered

(if applicable) StarACS Data.

E For MS Rebooted Since, MS Registered Since and MS Updated Since searches: Only filtered StarACS

data is presented (no merge is made, basically ignoring StarQuality and AlvariSTAR data.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 154

Page 166: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesMS ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services MS Manager

F For MSs without Lat/Long/MSs without Address searches:

» AlvariSTAR Data - contains all data received from AlvariSTAR

» StarQuality Data - contains all data received from StarQuality

» StarACS Data - contains all filtered data received from StarACS

Merged Data (final data) contains all MSs in StarACS Data that have MACs in AlvariSTAR Data or

StarQuality Data. If necessary, BS IDs from StarACS Data are replaced with BS ID from AlvariSTAR Data

(first priority) or StarQuality Data (second priority).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 155

Page 167: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

6.2 The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the MS Connection Maintenance Manager

Retrieval of MS Data

Retrieval of All MSs Data

Single MS De-Registration

All MSs De-Registration

6.2.1 Introduction to the MS Connection Maintenance Manager

The MS Connection Maintenance Manager supports MS-Level operations related to the display of the

momentary values of a predefined set of parameters of a specific Mobile Subscriber (MS). These

parameter values can to be evaluated during operator-initiated troubleshooting. In addition, this feature

enables forced de-registration of one or multiple MSs from the network.

In the current release MS-level operations supported by the management system are targeted towards

the ASN-GW.

1 Select Managed Network > MS Connection Maintenance from the Main Menu. The MS Connection

Maintenance tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the MS Connection Maintenance Manager is

displayed.

2 In the Operation drop-down menu, select the required operation. The available options are:

» “Retrieval of MS Data” on page 157

» “Retrieval of All MSs Data” on page 158

» “Single MS De-Registration” on page 162

» “All MSs De-Registration” on page 163

INFORMATIONThe MS Connection Maintenance manager is available only if the installed Device Drivers include at least one Device Driver for a device family that support this feature. In the current release this is applicable only for 4Motion.

To open the MS Connection Maintenance Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 156

Page 168: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

6.2.2 Retrieval of MS Data

The Retrieval of MS Data option is used to retrieve data related to a specific MS, as maintained by the

ASN-GW that currently serves the MS.

To retrieve data related to a specific MS, enter the ASN-GW IP Address of the ASN-GW currently serving

the MS (Bearer IP address), and the MS Outer NAI (the complete NAI, a string of up to 253 characters,

such as {am=1}[email protected]). The settings of the MS

identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server.

Click Apply to retrieve the data for the specified MS.

The displayed details include:

Figure 6-4: MS Connection Maintenance - Retrieval of MS Data - Request Details

Parameter Description

Target

ASN-GW IP Address The IP address of the target device (Bearer interface IP address).

ASN-GW BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the target device.

MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 157

Page 169: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

The following buttons are now available:

6.2.3 Retrieval of All MSs Data

The Retrieval of All MSs Data option is used to retrieve general details related to all MSs served by a

specific ASN-GW, as maintained by the ASN-GW.

MS Data

MS ID (MAC Address) the MS ID (MAC address)

Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS.

Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the serving device.

Associated Service Flows (per flow assigned to the MS)

SF-ID The Service Flow ID.

Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow.

Direction The direction of the Service Flow (Up or Down).

Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address.

Button Description

Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data.

Home Click to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.

De-Register MS Click to force de-registration of the MS.

Retrieve All MSs Data Click to retrieve data for all MSs served by the same target equipment. Refer to Retrieval of All MSs Data below.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 158

Page 170: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

You can select the serving entity by any of the following options:

ASN-GW IP Address (the Bearer interface IP address of the target device).

ASN-GW BTS Number (the BTS Number of the target device).

NPU Management IP Address (the IP address of the interface used for managing the site (NPU) to

which the ASN-GW is assigned).

Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option.

Click Apply to retrieve the data for all MSs served by the specified ASN-GW.

Figure 6-5: MS Connection Maintenance - Retrieval of All MSs Data - Request Details

AlvariSTAR User Manual 159

Page 171: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

The displayed data for all MSs served by the specified entity includes:

You can expand the displayed details for selected MSs (using the +/- expand/contract button on the left

side of each MS entry) to view also the following details for each Service Flow assigned to the MS:

Figure 6-6: MS Connection Maintenance - Retrieval of All MSs Data - Results

Parameter Description

Target

ASN-GW IP Address The IP address of the target device (Bearer interface IP address).

ASN-GW BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the target device.

MS Data (per MS served by the target device)

MS ID the MS ID (MAC address)

Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 160

Page 172: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

The following buttons are now available:

The displayed full details for the selected MS include:

Parameter Description

Service Flow ID The Service Flow ID

Assigned IP The assigned IP address

Button Description

Refresh Click to refresh the displayed data.

Home Click to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.

Export List to CSV Click to open the Select Export Destination File, allowing you to export the All MSs Data to a CSV file in a selectable location.

De-Register All MSs Click to force de-registration of all MSs served by the selected device.

Retrieve Selected MS Full Data

Select an entry in the MS Data table and click to retrieve from the ASN-GW full details for the selected MS. See below the displayed details.

Figure 6-7: Retrieve Selected MS Full data - Results

AlvariSTAR User Manual 161

Page 173: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

The following buttons are now available (in addition to the Refresh and Home buttons):

6.2.4 Single MS De-Registration

The Single MS De-Registration option is used to force de-registration of a specific MS.

Parameter Description

Target

ASN-GW IP Address The IP address of the target device (Bearer interface IP address).

ASN-GW BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the target device.

MS Outer NAI The Outer NAI string of the selected MS.

MS Data

MS ID (MAC Address) the MS ID (MAC address)

Serving BS ID The full ID of the serving BS.

Serving BS BTS Number The BTS Number (Site ID) of the serving device.

Associated Service Flows (per flow assigned to the MS)

SF-ID The Service Flow ID.

Mapped GRE Key The GRE Key mapped to the Service Flow.

Direction The direction of the Service Flow (Up or Down).

Assigned IP Address The assigned IP address.

Button Description

Retrieve All MSs Data Click to return to the previous screen displaying summary details for all MSs served by the selected device.

De-Register MS Click to force de-registration of the MS.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 162

Page 174: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

To force de-registration of a specific MS, enter the ASN-GW IP Address of the ASN-GW currently serving

the MS (Bearer IP address), and the MS Outer NAI (the complete NAI, a string of up to 253 characters,

such as {am=1}[email protected]). The settings of the MS

identification data depends on getting this data from the AAA server.

Click Apply to force de-registration of the specified MS.

You can click Home to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.

6.2.5 All MSs De-Registration

The All MSs De-Registration option is used to force de-registration of all MSs served by a specific device.

Figure 6-8: MS Connection Maintenance - Single MS De-Registration

AlvariSTAR User Manual 163

Page 175: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 6 - MS ServicesThe MS Connection Maintenance ManagerChapter 6 - MS Services The MS Connection Maintenance Manager

You can select the serving entity by:

ASN-GW IP Address (the Bearer interface IP address of the target device).

ASN-GW BTS Number (the BTS Number of the target device).

NPU Management IP Address (the IP address of the interface used for managing the site (NPU) to

which the ASN-GW is assigned).

Select the option you want to use and enter the applicable value in the field next to the selected option.

Click Apply to force de-registration of all MSs served by the specified device.

You can click Home to return to the main MS Connection Maintenance management window.

Figure 6-9: MS Connection Maintenance - All MSs De-Registration

AlvariSTAR User Manual 164

Page 176: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - Management

In This Chapter:

“Discovery Manager” on page 166

“Data Files Manager” on page 174

“The Contacts Manager” on page 188

“The Tasks Manager” on page 194

“Preferences Manager” on page 231

Page 177: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

7.1 Discovery Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Discovery Manager

Discovery Main Area

Discovery Details Panel

Discovery Actions Panel

Find Network Settings Panel

The Network Settings Window

7.1.1 Introduction to the Discovery Manager

The Discovery Manager enables defining IP ranges/subnets and associated SNMP communities to be

used for discovering network elements by the Network Scan task (see “Network Scan Task” on

page 210). For each IP range/subnet different discovery options may be enabled/disabled. In addition,

pre-configured Location and/or Contact may be configured to be automatically assigned to relevant

network elements upon discovery. A total of up to 65535 IPs may be defined.

Select Management > Discovery from the Main Menu. The Discovery tab is added to the tabs ribbon and

the Discovery Manager is displayed.

The Discovery Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

To open the Discovery Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 166

Page 178: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

7.1.2 Discovery Main Area

The Discovery grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured IP

ranges/subnets. The default sorting is by creation time, starting with the first created range/subnet.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:

:

Figure 7-1: The Discovery Manager Table

Parameter Description

Type The type of range definition: IP Range or Subnet.

Start IP/Network The first IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet base address in a Subnet.

End IP/Mask The last IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet Mask in a Subnet.

Discovery Indicates whether periodical discovery according to parameters defined in the Network Scan task (see “Network Scan Task” on page 210) is enabled or disabled.

Auto Discovery Indicates whether Auto Discovery for the range/subnet is enabled or disabled. When enabled, Discovery will be initiated whenever a trap is received from an undiscovered device whose IP address is in the range/subnet.

Location The optional location to be assigned to discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 167

Page 179: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

7.1.3 Discovery Details Panel

The Discovery Details section is applicable only for s single selected entry and it includes the following

tabs:

Discovery Details General Tab

Discovery Details SNMP Credentials Tab

7.1.3.1 Discovery Details General Tab

The General tab displays the same details as displayed for the selected entry in the main area. It also

includes the Contact details - the optional contact to be assigned to discovered devices whose IP address

is in the range/subnet.

SNMP Version The SNMP protocol version to be used for communication with the discovered devices. This can be either:

v1

v2c

v3

Figure 7-2: Discovery Details General Tab

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 168

Page 180: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

7.1.3.2 Discovery Details SNMP Credentials Tab

The SNMP Credential tab displays the details of SNMP credentials that will be used for discovery.

(excluding passwords for SNMP version v3). For more details refer to SNMP Credentials in “The Network

Settings Window” on page 170.

7.1.4 Discovery Actions Panel

The Discovery Actions panel includes the following options:

7.1.5 Find Network Settings Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

Figure 7-3: Discovery Details SNMP Credentials Tab (v1/v2c)

Option Action

New Opens the Network Setting window, enabling to add a new entry to the table (sse “The Network Settings Window” on page 170). Up to 65535 IPs are supported.

Edit Available only for a single selected entry. Opens the Network Setting window, enabling to edit the selected entry (sse “The Network Settings Window” on page 170).

Delete Click to delete the selected entry/entries.

Export Opens the Export Discovery Settings window, enabling to export the details of selected entries to an file (.xml) on the client’s file system. Browse to the location where the file is to be saved, specify a name for the file (the default is Discovery Settings) and click Export.

Import Opens the Import Discovery Settings window, enabling to import an existing file (.xml or .nar) of IP address ranges /subnets settings. Click to import an existing file (.xml or .nar) of IP address ranges /subnets settings. Browse to the location of the file, select the required file and click Import.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 169

Page 181: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

The simple Search is performed on Start IP/Network, End IP/Mask and Location columns.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Type: Available options include only IP Range/Subnet types that are actually available in the database.

Each Type will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.

Discovery: The possible options are Enabled and Disabled. Only option(s) that are actually available in

the database will be available, accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the

database.

SNMP Version: The possible options are v1, v2c and v3. Only option(s) that are actually available in the

database will be available, accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the

database.

Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

Start IP/Network

End IP/Mask

Auto Discovery

Location

7.1.6 The Network Settings Window

The Network Settings window enables creating a new discovery entry or editing an existing entry.

To create a new entry: Click on the New option in the Actions panel.

To edit an existing entry: Select the entry and click on the Edit option in the Actions panel.

To open the Network Settings window:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 170

Page 182: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

The Network Settings window includes the following parameters:

:

Figure 7-4: The Network Settings Window

Parameter Description

Type The type of range definition: IP Range or Subnet. Select from the drop-down menu whether to define the range using IP Range (the first and last address in the range) or Subnet (Network and Mask). The default for a new entry is IP Range.

Start IP/Network The first IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet base address in a Subnet.

End IP/Mask The last IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet Mask in a Subnet.

To minimize unnecessary traffic load in the network, avoid defining IP address ranges that include too many “gaps”, e.g., non existing addresses.

Discovery Defines whether periodical discovery according to parameters defined in the Network Scan task (see “Network Scan Task” on page 210) is enabled (selected) or disabled. The default for a new entry is enabled (selected).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 171

Page 183: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

Auto Discovery Defines whether Auto Discovery for the range/subnet is enabled (selected) or disabled. When enabled, Discovery will be initiated whenever a trap is received from an undiscovered device whose IP address is in the range/subnet. The default for a new entry is disabled (de-selected)

Location The optional location to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select location window allowing you to select a pre-configured location. For details refer to “The Select location Window” on page 103.

Contact The optional contact to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select contact window allowing you to select a pre-configured contact. For details refer to “The Select contact Window” on page 193.

SNMP Version The SNMP protocol version to be used for communication with the discovered devices. This can be either:

v1

v2c

v3

All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 172

Page 184: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementDiscovery ManagerChapter 7 - Management Discovery Manager

SNMP Credentials Use the Add and Remove buttons to populate the SNMP Credentials. At least one set of credentials must be defined. The type of credentials differ, depending on the SNMP version.

For SNMP v1 and v2c, fill in the read/write community table:

Read Community - SNMP Read community to be used by discovery when accessing devices in the range.

Write Community - The SNMP Write community to be used when accessing discovered devices in the range.

For SNMP v3, the following credentials apply:

Username - Username used for authentication

Security Level - Authentication and privacy settings

» NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled

» Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled

» Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled

Authentication Algorithm - Hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password

» MD5 - Message-Digest algorithm 5

» SHA - Secure Hash Algorithm

Authentication Password - Password used for authentication. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.

Privacy Algorithm - Encryption standard used for data transmission

» AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard

» DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard

Privacy Password - Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.

INFORMATION The Discovery process is based on the defined Read community. All future device management actions will use the defined Write community. If a wrong Write community was defined, the device will be discovered and displayed, but its status will be “Unknown” and it will not be possible to manage it. The same is true for cases where the Write community in the device was changed (not via the management system) after being discovered. In this case, device must be deleted from the database (see the Delete action in “Equipment Actions Panel” on page 43) and re-discovered using the updated Write community.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 173

Page 185: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

7.2 Data Files Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Data Files Manager

Data Files Main Area

Data Files Actions Panel

Find Data Files Panel

Select File Type Window

Multiple Restore Task

Using the Mass Configuration Wizard

The Data File Selector Window

7.2.1 Introduction to the Data Files Manager

The File Manager enables managing different types of files stored in the database. It also enables

importing certain file types to the database, exporting files to either the client file system or the server

file system, and initiating certain tasks using the files stored in the database.

Select Management > Data Files from the Main Menu. The Data Files tab is added to the tabs ribbon and

the Data Files Manager is displayed.

To open the Data Files Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 174

Page 186: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

7.2.2 Data Files Main Area

The Data Files grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the data files currently stored in the

database. The default sorting is according to the time at which the file was added to the database, in

ascending order.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:

:

Figure 7-5: The Data Files Table

Parameter Description

Name The name of the file. Typically, the name includes by default the data and time at which the file was created by the source device, using the real time clock of the source device. For more details refer to the File Manager section in the applicable Device Driver manual.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 175

Page 187: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

Category The general category of the file. Available Categories are:

Configuration

Performance

Logging

Firmware

Type The specific type of the file. The currently possible file types are:

COMPACT/4Motion:

» COMPACT/4M backup Current Configuration (Configuration Category)

» COMPACT/4M backup Older Configuration (Configuration Category)

» COMPACT/4M Offline Configuration (Configuration Category)

» 4M backup Logging (Logging Category)

» COMPACT/4M Performance (Performance Category)

» COMPACT/4M Vendor Configuration (Configuration Category)

Extreme:

» Extreme Full Config (Configuration Category)

» Extreme SP and MSF (Configuration Category)

» Extreme MS Inventory (Configuration Category)

» Extreme Event Log (Configuration Category)

» Extreme Country Codes (Firmware Category)

» Extreme FRU Heads (Firmware Category)

» Extreme License (Firmware Category)

Status The status of the file:

Normal: A file created by a task initiated by the management system (Backup or Performance Collection tasks initiated from either the Equipment Manager or the Tasks Manager).

Orphan: A backup file for a device that was removed from the database or a device for which the relevant identification details were changed using the management system.

Imported: An imported file.

Equipment Type The relevant device type.

Equipment Name The name of the relevant device.

Equipment Address The management IP address of the relevant device.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 176

Page 188: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

COMPACT and 4Motion backup files and Extreme Configuration files are generated using a Backup

task. For details refer to the Backup Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual. They may also be

imported.

COMPACT and 4Motion Offline Configuration files are generated using the Mass Configuration Wizard

(see “Using the Mass Configuration Wizard” on page 181). They may also be imported.

Vendor Configuration file (applicable for COMPACT and 4Motion): A vendor configuration file includes

vendor parameters that cannot be configured by the configuration tools available to the customer. If for

any reason the vendor will decide that any of these parameters should be modified, or if they should be

modified to meet specific requirements, a special file that includes the necessary modifications will be

prepared by the vendor and will be sent to the relevant customer(s). A Vendor Configuration file should

be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the Restore task.

License file (applicable for Extreme): A License file enables modifying some capabilities such as the

maximum number of MSs that can be served (for more details refer to the BTS Licensing Properties Tab

in the Extreme Device Driver Manual). To modify one or several of the relevant capabilities, a License file

should be acquired from the vendor. The License file include licenses for specific devices. A License file

should be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the Restore task.

Country Codes file (applicable for Extreme): The Country Codes file include parameters (including

parameters affected by relevant local regulation) on all frequency bands that may be used by Extreme

devices (for more details refer to the Sector Radio Band Capabilities Tab in the Extreme Device Driver

Manual). Should there be any need to update this file without loading a new SW version, the vendor will

make required changed and will send the modified file to relevant customers. A Country Codes file

should be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the Restore task.

RFU Heads file (applicable for Extreme): The RFU Heads file include certain parameters of all that may be

used by Extreme devices. Should there be any need to update this file without loading a new SW

version, the vendor will make required changed and will send the modified file to relevant customers. A

RFU Heads file should be imported to the Data Files database and loaded to relevant devices using the

Restore task.

7.2.3 Data Files Actions Panel

The Data Files Actions panel includes the following options:

Date The date and time at which the file was added to the database of the management system.

Option Action

Delete Deletes the selected file(s) from the database.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 177

Page 189: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

Export Exports the selected file(s) to the client file-system.

For a single COMPACT or 4Motion file, or any combination of multiple selected files that include at least one COMPACT or 4Motion file, opens the Select a directory for export window, allowing to browse to the desired location on the client file-system. Click Select to complete the Export to the selected folder (you may use the Make New Folder option to create a new target file in desired location).

For a single Extreme file, opens the Save window, allowing to browse to the desired location on the client file-system (you may right-click on a folder and select the New Folder option to create a new target file in desired location). The default name for the file to be saved in indicated in the File Name text box, allowing you to enter a new name for the file to be saved. Click Save to complete the export.

For any combination of multiple selected files that include at least one Extremefile, the Export action is not applicable.

Import Imports a file from the client file-system to the Data Files database. Click to open the Select File Type window (see “Select File Type Window” on page 179) and select the required file type. The default is Generic File which means any relevant file. Click Ok to open the Import File window, browse to the location on the client file-system where the file is stored, select the file and click Import. A files that does not match the selection criteria defined in the Select File Type window or cannot be validated will not be imported.

Export to Server Exports the selected file(s) to the server file system. The files will be saved in the <Disk_Drive>/AlvariSTAR/filesystem directory.

Mass Configuration

Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. Applicable only for a single selected backup configuration file. Opens the Mass Configuration Wizard, enabling generation of offline configuration files based on the selected backup file. For details refer to “Using the Mass Configuration Wizard” on page 181.

Restore For a a single selected file, excluding 4M backup Logging, COMPACT/4M Performance, Extreme MS Inventory, and Extreme Event Log files, opens a Restore task enabling to load the selected file to target device(s). For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver manual.

For multiple selected files of one of the following types, opens the Multiple Restore task (see “Multiple Restore Task” on page 180), enabling to initiate multiple tasks for loading the selected files to relevant target devices.

COMPACT Backup files

COMPACT Offline Configuration files

4Motion Backup files

4Motion Offline Configuration files

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 178

Page 190: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

7.2.4 Find Data Files Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Using the Grid View” on

page 18.

The simple Search is performed on File Name, Equipment Name, and Equipment Address columns.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Category: Available options include only file categories that are actually available in the database.

Each category will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.

Type: Available options include only file types that are actually available in the database. Each file type

will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.

Equipment Types: Available options include only equipment types that are actually available in the

database. Each equipment type will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant

instances in the database.

Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

Name

Status

Equipment Name

Equipment Address

Date

7.2.5 Select File Type Window

To open the Select File Type window, click on the Import option:

Select one of the options in the Import File As drop-down list:

Figure 7-6: Select File Type Window

AlvariSTAR User Manual 179

Page 191: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

Click OK to close the Select File Type window and open the Import File window.

7.2.6 Multiple Restore Task

The Multiple Restore task enables initiating multiple configuration tasks for loading selected

configuration files to the target devices. The configuration files can be:

COMPACT Backup files

COMPACT Offline Configuration files

4Motion Backup files

4Motion Offline Configuration files

Option Description

Generic File (the default) The Import File window will enable selecting a file of any of the following types:

.gz: Applicable for all files originally created in 4Motion or COMPACT devices (Backup or Performance Collection) or Offline Configuration files for these devices.

.res: Applicable for Extreme backup files.

.sig: Applicable for Extreme Country Codes or RFU Heads files.

.lic: Applicable for Extreme License files.

.xml: Applicable for Vendor Configuration files.

4M BTS File The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for files originally created in 4Motion devices (Backup or Performance Collection).

4M Offline Configuration File

The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for 4M Offline Configuration File.

Extreme BTS File The Import File window will enable selecting a .res file. This option is applicable only for files originally created in Extreme devices (Backup).

COMPACT BTS File The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for files originally created in COMPACT devices (Backup or Performance Collection).

COMPACT Offline Configuration File

The Import File window will enable selecting a .gz file. This option is applicable only for COMPACT Offline Configuration File.

The Multiple Restore Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 180

Page 192: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

In the Data Files Manager select the required multiple files (all files must be of the same type) and click

on the Restore option. The Multiple Restore Task editor is displayed:

The Multiple Restore Task editor includes the following options:

Click OK to initiate the restore tasks (if Run the tasks now option was selected) or to create all the tasks

and add them to the Tasks Manager ((if Run the tasks now option was not selected).

The default name for each task includes the task’s type, the date and time at which the task was created,

and an auto-sequential task number: restore_task_<yyyymmddhhmmss>_<n>.

7.2.7 Using the Mass Configuration Wizard

To open the Multiple Restore Task Editor:

Figure 7-7: Multiple Restore Task Editor

Option Description

Auto Reset Select to automatically reset each target device for applying the new configuration after successful completion of the Restore task for the relevant device. The default is not selected (no automatic reset).

Run the tasks now Select to run the tasks immediately after clicking the OK button. If not selected, all tasks will be created and added to the Tasks Manager as regular Restore Configuration tasks.

Delete the successful tasks Select to delete the successfully completed tasks from the Tasks Manager’s window. Only tasks that were not completed successfully will remain in the Tasks Manager. If not selected, all tasks will remain in the Tasks Manager. The default is not selected (all tasks will remain).

INFORMATION The Mass Configuration Wizard is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion).

By default the Mass Configuration Wizard can be used to create a single offline configuration file, using an Excel file containing specific configuration details for a single new site. To simultaneously create multiple offline configuration files for two or more new sites a suitable license is required.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 181

Page 193: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

The Mass Configuration Wizard offers a simple process for creating multiple site configuration files.

This section includes:

Starting the Mass Configuration Wizard

Mass Configuration Wizard - Common Parameters

Mass Configuration Wizard - Import Unique Parameters File

Mass Configuration Wizard - Merge File

Mass Configuration Wizard - Summary

7.2.7.1 Starting the Mass Configuration Wizard

For a backup file based Mass Configuration Wizard (applicable for 4Motion backup configuration

files): In the File Manager, select the backup configuration file to be used as the “golden” file,

right-click and select the Mass Configuration option to open the Mass Configuration Wizard,

displaying the name of the selected backup file.

For a Project file based Mass Configuration Wizard ((applicable for COMPACT): In the Configuration

Operations menu select the Offline Project Configuration option to open the Offline Project

Configuration manager. In the Offline Project Configuration manager select the Multi Site Project to

be used as the basis for preparing configuration files and select the Mass Configuration option to

open the Mass Configuration Wizard, displaying the name of the selected Project.

To start the Mass Configuration Wizard

INFORMATION

The per-site Unique Parameters Excel file to be used by the wizard for generating configuration files should be prepared and be available in the client file system prior to initiating the wizard.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 182

Page 194: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

7.2.7.2 Mass Configuration Wizard - Common Parameters

The name of the Project/Backup file to be used as the common parameters file for the wizard is

displayed.

Click Next to load the selected common parameters file.

7.2.7.3 Mass Configuration Wizard - Import Unique Parameters File

Figure 7-8: Mass Configuration Wizard - Common Parameters

Figure 7-9: Mass Configuration Wizard - Import Unique Parameters File

AlvariSTAR User Manual 183

Page 195: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

1 Use the Select File button to open the Open window, allowing you to browse to the location of the

pre-prepared Excel file. For a Project based Common Parameters file the default Unique Parameters

File is the one created when preparing the project. Select the required Excel file and click Open.

2 Click Next. If the general configuration structure (such as number of BSs defined for each site) in the

Excel file does not match the general configuration structure of the selected common parameters

project/backup file, an error message indicating the mismatch will be displayed.

3 If there are any detectable configuration errors in the file (such as if a parameter that should be

unique appears more than once or a non-valid value) an Invalid Unique Parameters window will be

displayed, indicating the detected errors.

The next step will become available only if a usable Excel file is selected.

Figure 7-10: Mass Configuration Wizard - Invalid Unique Parameters

AlvariSTAR User Manual 184

Page 196: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

7.2.7.4 Mass Configuration Wizard - Merge File

A table displaying the main identification parameters of the new sites will be displayed. Click Next to

generate the configuration files for the listed sites. If there are any consistency problems a Consistency

Rules Issues window will open, indicating the detected problems.

New configuration files can be generated only if there are no consistency rules issues for all sites defined

in the Excel file. If there are any consistency rules issues, a message indicating the problem will be

displayed. The wizard should be restarted after correcting all consistency rules issues.

Figure 7-11: Mass Configuration Wizard - Merge File

AlvariSTAR User Manual 185

Page 197: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

7.2.7.5 Mass Configuration Wizard - Summary

If there were no consistency rules issues, all the required configuration files can be generated. The

Summary window displays the main details of the files that will be generated. For each site whose

specific configuration details are provided in the Excel file, the Mass Configuration Wizard will generate

a validated and signed XML configuration file to be used during installation.

Figure 7-12: Mass Configuration Wizard - Consistency Rules Issues

Figure 7-13: Mass Configuration Wizard - Summary

AlvariSTAR User Manual 186

Page 198: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementData Files ManagerChapter 7 - Management Data Files Manager

Click Finish to generate the files and save them as Offline Configuration files. Each file includes all

parameters configured when preparing the Project, the per-site unique parameters from the Excel file,

and relevant automatically calculated parameter. All other parameters will be provided with their default

values.

After discovery of new device(s) by the management system, you can use the Multiple Restore task (see

“Multiple Restore Task” on page 180) to load a the suitable offline configuration file(s) to the relevant

device(s). Association of a configuration file to a target device is based on the Management IP Address.

7.2.8 The Data File Selector Window

The Data File Selector window is opened whenever there is a need to select a file for a restore task.

You may use the Find Data File panel to search for data file(s) that meet specific criteria.

Select a single file and click Apply to return to the relevant task.

Figure 7-14: Data File Selector

AlvariSTAR User Manual 187

Page 199: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager

7.3 The Contacts Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Contacts Manager

Contacts Main Area

Contact Details Panel

Contacts Actions Panel

Find Contacts Panel

Contact Editor

The Select contact Window

7.3.1 Introduction to the Contacts Manager

The Contacts Manager enables managing contacts for managed devices. Each device can be associated

with a contact, which is typically the person responsible for the device that should be contacted

whenever there is any problem associated with it.

Note that the contact assigned to a device by the management system may differ from the contact

parameter configured in the device.

To associate either a single device with a contact or several devices with the same contact, use the Edit

Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager (see “The Network Element Editor” on page 50 and

“The Common attributes Editor” on page 54).

You may also simplify the contacts assignment process by specifying contacts in the discovery definitions

(see “Discovery Manager” on page 166 and “Discovery Task” on page 219).

Select Management > Contacts from the Main Menu. The Contacts tab is added to the tabs ribbon and

the Contacts Manager is displayed.

To open the Contacts Manager:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 188

Page 200: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager

7.3.2 Contacts Main Area

The Contacts grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured Contacts.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:

:

Figure 7-15: Contacts Table

Parameter Description

Contact Icon An icon indicating whether the contact is a single person ( ) or a group ( ).

Contact id A unique identifier for the contact.

First Name Optional. The contact’s first name.

Last Name Optional. The contact’s last name.

Company Optional. The contact’s company name.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 189

Page 201: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager

7.3.3 Contact Details Panel

The read-only information available in the Contact Details section for a single selected contact includes:

Contact id

First Name

Last Name

Company

Contact icon

Address

Phone number

Mobile number

E-Mail

Fax number

For details on these parameters refer to “Contact Editor” on page 191.

For multiple selected Contacts no details are displayed.

7.3.4 Contacts Actions Panel

The Contact Actions panel includes the following options:

Figure 7-16: Contacts Details

Option Action

New Opens the Contact editor window, allowing definition of a new contact. See “Contact Editor” on page 191 for details.

Edit Available only for a single selected contact. Opens the Contact editor window with the current configuration of the selected contact, enabling to modify the configuration. See “Contact Editor” on page 191 for details.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 190

Page 202: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager

7.3.5 Find Contacts Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filters options are not available for contacts.

Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

Contact id

First Name

Last Name

Company

7.3.6 Contact Editor

The Contact Editor enables creating a new contact or modifying details of an existing location.

1 In the Actions panel:

» Click on New to create a new contact, or

» Select a contact and click on Edit to modify the selected contact.

Delete Enables to delete the selected contact(s) from the database. If a contact is associated with equipment or specified in any discovery task it cannot be deleted.

To create/modify a contact:

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 191

Page 203: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager

2 Type in or modify the Contact Editor fields as required:

3 Click OK.

Figure 7-17: Contact Editor

Parameter Description

Contact id A unique identifier for this contact. Up to 80 printable characters.

First Name Optional. The contact’s first name. Up to 80 printable characters.

Last Name Optional. The contact’s last name. Up to 80 printable characters.

Company Optional. The contact’s company name. Up to 80 printable characters.

Contact icon Optional. Select from the drop-down list an icon to represent this contact: Contact for a single contact person or Group.

Address Optional. The contact’s address. Up to 80 printable characters.

Phone Number Optional. The contact’s phone number. Up to 80 numbers (only number are allowed).

Mobile Number Optional. The contact’s mobile number. Up to 80 numbers (only number are allowed).

Email Optional. The contact’s e-mail address. Up to 80 printable characters. Must be in an e-mail address format.

Fax Number Optional. The contact’s fax number. Up to 80 numbers (only number are allowed).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 192

Page 204: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Contacts ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Contacts Manager

7.3.7 The Select contact Window

The Select contact window is opened whenever there is a need to assign a contact to one or several

specific entities, such as when creating/editing a Network Settings entry in the Discovery Manager or

when using the Edit Connectivity action in the Equipment Manager for updating the parameters of one

or several devices.

contacts are displayed as in the Contacts Manager main area.

You can use the Advanced Filtering option to search for contact(s) that meet certain criteria.

Select a single contact and click Apply to assign the contact to the relevant entity/entities.

Figure 7-18: Select contact

AlvariSTAR User Manual 193

Page 205: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4 The Tasks Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Tasks Manager

Tasks Main Area

Task Details Panel

Tasks Actions Panel

Find Tasks Panel

Task Types

The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators

The Task Scheduler

The Runtime Results Window

The Task Report Window

The Task Results Window

Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)

Network Scan Task

Database Aging Tasks

LDAP Backup/File Aging Task

Configuration History Backup and Aging Task

File Data Aging Tasks

Mutual Neighboring Task

Discovery Task

Multiple Configuration Task

7.4.1 Introduction to the Tasks Manager

Tasks are operations that are performed on one or several system entities such as managed devices or

general operations performed by the network management system. They run in the background,

allowing the users of the network management system to continue managing the network while they

run. After a task has completed, or upon termination of a task, a report is issued.

The Tasks Manager displays information on existing tasks and enables editing, scheduling, running or

deleting existing tasks.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 194

Page 206: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Select Management > Tasks from the Main Menu. The Tasks tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the

Tasks Manager is displayed

7.4.2 Tasks Main Area

The Tasks grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently existing Tasks.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each entry includes:

:

To open the Tasks Manager:

Figure 7-19: The Tasks Table

Parameter Description

Name The task’s name.

Created By The name of the user that created the task or SYSTEM for tasks created by the network management system.

Modified By The name of the last user that modified the task.

Volatile A volatile task is not saved in the database. It can be run only once and it will be displayed in the Task Manager (with Volatile status Yes) only for a short time. This is applicable only for certain tasks that are not initiated from the Task Manager.

Type The type of task. See details in “Task Types” on page 200.

State The current state of the task: Active, Inactive, Waiting, Stopping.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 195

Page 207: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.3 Task Details Panel

The read-only information available in the Task Details section for a single selected task includes the

following tabs:

Tasks Details Basic Tab

Tasks Details Results Tab

7.4.3.1 Tasks Details Basic Tab

The following details are available in the Basic tab:

Name

Description (if available)

Category (type)

Created By

Last Run The date and time the last time the task was run (or null if was never run).

Last Run Result The result of the task’s last run: Completed/Completed with errors/Aborted/Never run.

Next Run The next date and time at which the task is scheduled to run, or null if not scheduled.

Figure 7-20: Tasks Details Basic Tab

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 196

Page 208: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.3.2 Tasks Details Results Tab

The Results tab presents the time-line and results for all instances of the relevant task in a certain period.

All instances are presented in a single row. A slide selector enables selecting one of the following values

for the displayed time window size:

1 Day

2 Days (default)

5 Days

7 Days

Horizontal scroll mechanism using left & right arrows enables shifting the displayed information to

desired dates. By default the center of the window is the current date and time.

Task instances are colored as follows:

A single successful instance: Green

A single partially successful instance (e.g. SW Upgrade task-instance for multiple devices, in which the

task ended successfully for some devices and failed for other devices: Yellow

A single failed instance: Red

Multiple instances with the same result: The same color as for a single instance.

Multiple instances with different results: Striped with Green, Yellow and Red.

A future (scheduled) instances - Blue

A special icon indicates overlapping task instance (due to currently-used zoom level).

A single-task instance information shall be presented in a bubble upon mouse hovering over the specific

instance. This information shall include:

Task Category (type)

Figure 7-21: Tasks Details Results Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 197

Page 209: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Task Name

Date & time

Result

7.4.4 Tasks Actions Panel

The Tasks Actions panel includes the following options:

Option Action

New Opens the Task wizard, allowing definition of a new task. In the current release this is applicable only for a Discovery task (see“Discovery Task” on page 219). All other new tasks are created from the relevant Manager.

Edit Available only for a single selected task. For an inactive task, opens the task editor window for the selected task, enabling to modify the task’s parameters. For a currently running task, opens the Runtime Results window (see “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205) enabling to see runtime results for the task.

Delete Delete the selected task(s) from the database. Not available for active tasks and for system tasks (Created By is SYSTEM).

Scheduled tasks cannot be deleted. To delete a scheduled task, you need to first unschedule it (see below).

Run Manually executes the task. While the task is running, the state changes from Inactive to Active. The option is unavailable for currently running tasks. If there are more than 20 active tasks, the state of some of the tasks may change from Inactive to Waiting.

When attempting to run a task which affects equipment that is not part of the user’s visibility domain, a meaningful message will be displayed in the task report.

Upon selecting the Run option for a previously executed Software Upgrade task that was completed with errors, the Previously Run Task window (See “Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)” on page 209) will open, enabling selection of actions for the next run of the task.

Abort Aborts the selected running task. Available for running tasks only (State is Active or Waiting). Upon selecting the Abort option, a confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to abort the task. The task’s State changes to Inactive (in some cases it may temporarily change to Stopping), and the Last Run Result to Aborted.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 198

Page 210: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.5 Find Tasks Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search is performed on File Name, Created By, and Modified By columns.

Pre-defined Filters include:

Volatile: Available options include only volatility status that are actually available in the database. Each

option will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.

State: Available options include only task states that are actually available in the database. Each task

state will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in the database.

Last Run Results: Available options include only last run result options that are actually available in the

database. Each result option will be accompanied by the current total number of relevant instances in

the database.

Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

Name

Created By

Modified By

Last Run

Next Run

Schedule Opens the Schedule Editor (See “The Task Scheduler” on page 203), enabling to schedule future activation(s) of the task (or change the scheduling of a previously scheduled task). Not available for currently running tasks.

Unschedule Clears the configured scheduling for the selected task. Available only for scheduled tasks.

Report Not available for tasks that were never run. For a completed task opens the Task Report window (See “The Task Report Window” on page 206), enabling to view a report of the last execution of the selected task. For a currently running tasks opens the Run Time Results window ((See “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205).

History Opens the Task Results window (See “The Task Results Window” on page 208), displaying a list of all past activations of the selected task and their results. You may select a specific instance and view its detailed report.

Not available for tasks that were never run.

Option Action

AlvariSTAR User Manual 199

Page 211: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.6 Task Types

Possibly task types include:

SYSTEM tasks: These are pre-defined tasks created automatically by the network management system

(Created BY is SYSTEM) according to the installed Device Drivers. SYSTEM tasks cannot be deleted.

The list of possible SYSTEM tasks include:

» Network Scan: Task type is Network Discovery. Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For

details refer to “Network Scan Task” on page 210.

» Audit Log DAP: Task type is Database Aging. For details refer to “Database Aging Tasks” on

page 211.

» Event History DAP: Task type is Database Aging. For details refer to “Database Aging Tasks” on

page 211.

» LDAP Backup/File Aging: Task type is LDAP Backup/File Aging. For details refer to “LDAP

Backup/File Aging Task” on page 213.

» COMPACT File Data Aging: Task type is COMPACT File Data Aging. Available only if a COMPACT

Device Driver is installed. For details refer to “File Data Aging Tasks” on page 214.

» 4M File Data Aging: Task type is 4M File Data Aging. Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is

installed. For details refer to“File Data Aging Tasks” on page 214.

» Configuration History Backup and Aging Task: Task type is Configuration History Aging. Available

only if installed Device Driver(s) include COMPACT and/or 4Motion Device Driver(s). For details

refer to“Configuration History Backup and Aging Task” on page 213.

» Mutual Neighboring: Task type is Mutual Neighboring. Available only if installed Device Driver(s)

include COMPACT and/or 4Motion Device Driver(s). Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For

details refer to“Mutual Neighboring Task” on page 215.

Tasks created by users:

» Discovery Task: A new task can be created from the Tasks Manager using the New action. Not

applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to “Discovery Task” on page 219.

» Multiple Configuration: A new task can be created from either the Equipment Manager using the

Multiple Configuration action or in the Configuration Templates Manager using the Apply action.

Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to “Multiple Configuration Task” on

page 225.

» 4M Backup Configuration: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can

be created in the Equipment Manager using the Backup action. For details refer to the Backup

Configuration Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 200

Page 212: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

» COMPACT Backup Configuration: Available only if a COMPACT Device Driver is installed. A new

task can be created from the Equipment Manager using the Backup action. For details refer to the

Backup Configuration Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» Extreme Configuration Backup: Available only if an Extreme Device Driver is installed. A new task

can be created from the Equipment Manager using the Backup action. For details refer to the

Configuration Backup Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» COMPACT Performance Collection: Available only if ia COMPACT Device Driver is installed. A new

task can be created from the Equipment Manager using the Collect Performance Data action. Not

applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to the Performance Collection Task section

in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» 4M Performance Collection: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can

be created from the Equipment Manager using the Collect Performance Data action. Not

applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility. For details refer to the Performance Collection Task section

in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» COMPACT Restore Configuration: Available only if a COMPACT Device Driver is installed. A new

task can be created from either the Equipment Manager or Data Files Manager using the Restore

action. For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» 4M Restore Configuration: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can

be created from either the Equipment Manager or Data Files Manager using the Restore action.

For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» Extreme Configuration Restore: Available only if a Extreme Device Driver is installed. A new task

can be created from either the Equipment Manager or Data Files Manager using the Restore

action. For details refer to the Restore Task section in the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» COMPACT/4M/Extreme Software Upgrade: A new task can be created from the Equipment

Manager using the SW Upgrade action. For details refer to the Software Upgrade Task section in

the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» CLI Task: Available only if a 4Motion Device Driver is installed. A new task can be created from the

Equipment Manager using the Run CLI Scripts action. For details refer to the CLI Task section in

the relevant Device Driver Manual.

» Geolocation and Bing Tasks: New tasks can be created from the Preferences manager using the

MS Coordinates Import feature. For details refer to “The Geolocation and Bing Tasks” on

page 242.

7.4.7 The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators

To open the Task Editor for an existing task:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 201

Page 213: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

In the Task Manager window, select a single task and click on the Edit action.

In the relevant manager, select one or several entities (according to specific limitations) and click on the

relevant action.

The parameters/functionality of a Task Editor depend on the specific task.

The following general controls and indicators are available at the bottom of all task editors:

To open the Task Editor for a new task:

Figure 7-22: The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators

Click To:

OK button For an existing task: Save any changes and closes the task window.

For a new task: Save the task and its parameters.in the Tasks database

Cancel button For an existing task: Close the task window without saving changes.

For a new task: Close the task window without saving the task

Run Execute the task. Not available for a currently Active task. While the task is running, the state changes from Inactive to Active. If there are more than 20 active tasks, the state of some of the tasks may change from Inactive to Waiting.

When attempting to run a task which affects equipment that is not part of the user’s visibility domain, a meaningful message will be displayed in the task report.

Upon selecting the Run option for a previously executed Software Upgrade task that was completed with errors, the Previously Run Task window (See “Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)” on page 209) will open, enabling selection of actions for the next run of the task.

Abort Stop the task. Available only for a currently running task (State is Active or Waiting). A confirmation message is displayed. Click Yes to abort the task. The task’s State changes to Inactive (in some cases it may temporarily change to Stopping), and the Last Run Result to Aborted.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 202

Page 214: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The task’s State and Last Run Results are also displayed.

7.4.8 The Task Scheduler

Tasks can be scheduled to run either once at a predefined date and time, or several times at a predefined

recurrence interval. Several SYSTEM tasks (LDAP/Backup File Aging, Event History DAP, Audit Log DAP,

Configuration History Backup and Aging Task) are defined by default with a never ending recurrence.

In the Task Manager, select the task and click on Schedule to open the Schedule window. Alternatively,

you can schedule a task during task creation, or while editing a task, by clicking on the Scheduler icon at

the bottom of the task window. The Schedule Editor opens:

View Report Not applicable for a task that was never run. For a completed task opens the task report for last run results (see “The Task Report Window” on page 206). For a currently Active task opens the Run Time Results window (see “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205).

Schedule Open the Schedule Editor (See “The Task Scheduler” on page 203), enabling to schedule future activation(s) of the task (or change the scheduling of a previously scheduled task). Not available for currently running tasks.

Help Open the On Line Help for the task

To schedule a task:

Click To:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 203

Page 215: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The Schedule Editor includes the following parameters:

Figure 7-23: Schedule Editor

Parameter Description

Start The start time for the task. Select one of the following options:

Now (the default)

On - The default activation date is the current date, meaning now. Specify a different date using one of the following options:

» Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date), in the proper format (by default: MM/DD/YY).

» Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic display.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 204

Page 216: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

4 Set the Start and End time and optionally select a recurrence interval.

5 Click OK to apply the schedule for the selected task.

7.4.9 The Runtime Results Window

The Runtime Results window provides runtime results for a currently active task.

Recurrence Set the recurrence interval between each task execution. Available intervals include:

None - no recurrence (default)

Minutely - specify the number of minutes. (the range is 1-1,440)

Hourly - specify the number of hours. (the range is 1-96).

Daily - specify the number of days. (the range is 1-60)

Weekly - select one of the following options:

» Recur every - enter the number of weeks between task executions (the range is 1-20)

» Day - specify the day of the week (Sunday to Saturday) and the number of weeks between task executions (the range is 1-20).

Monthly - select one of the following options:

» Recur every - enter the number of months between task executions (the range is 1-36)

» Day - specify the day in the month (1-31) and the number of months between task executions (the range is 1-36).

End The end time for a recurring task (only). Select one of the following options:

Never - enables a recurring task to be executed indefinitely

After N occurrences (where N is a number between 1-65,000) - set the number of occurrences after which the task’s scheduling will be cleared.

On - The default is the current date. Specify a different date using one of the following options:

» Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date), in the proper format (by default: MM/DD/YY).

» Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic display.

To open the Runtime Results Window for an active task:

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 205

Page 217: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Select the active task and click on Edit to open the Runtime Results window, displaying the status of the

running task.

The Runtime Results window will open automatically upon running a new task if the show runtime

results option in the last (Finish Task) step of the Task Wizard, is selected and the configured Finish

Action is run now. Currently this is applicable only for a Discovery task (see “Creating a new Discovery

Task” on page 219).

After completion of the task, the View report button becomes active. You can click on this button to

open the Task Report (see “The Task Report Window” on page 206) for the completed task.

7.4.10 The Task Report Window

The Task Report window provide details on a previously completed task.

Figure 7-24: Runtime Results Window (Network Discovery Task)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 206

Page 218: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Select an inactive task and click on Report to open the Task Report for the last activation of the task (not

available for tasks that were never run).

The Task Report for the last activation of the task can also be accessed from each task editor (see “The

Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on page 201).

The Task Report for any previous activations of the task can be access from the Task Results window (see

“The Task Results Window” on page 208).

The structure and contents of the Task Report depend on the specific task.

The following controls are available:

Figure 7-25: Task Report Window

To open the Task Report Window:

Button Description

Save As Click to open the Save window. Browse to a location in the file system, enter a name for the file and click Save.

Print Click to open the Print Preview window. Select the required printing preferences and click on the Print icon.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 207

Page 219: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.11 The Task Results Window

The Task Results window displays a list of all past activations of the selected task selected and their

results. Not available for tasks that were never run.

In the Task Manager, select a task from and click on History. The Task Results window is displayed.

The Task Results window displays the following information for each listed activation of the selected

task:

Filter The Filter functionality is not available for some reports. Use the Drop-Down List (on the right side of the Filter text field) to open the list of possible status/result options, select the desired option and click the Filter button to view only task operations that meet the specified criterion.

Close Click to close the Task Report window.

To open the Task Results window:

Figure 7-26: Task Results Window

Parameter Description

Start The start date and time of the activation.

End The end date and time of the activation.

Result The result of the activation.

Button Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 208

Page 220: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Use the Task Results controls as required:

7.4.12 Previously Run Task (Task Rerun)

In the current release the Task Rerun feature is applicable only for Software Upgrade tasks. If a previously

executed task was completed with errors, you have several options when trying to run it again.

Upon selecting the Run option for a previously executed task that was completed with errors, the

Previously Run Task window will be displayed:

You can choose to rerun the task on all devices in the list or only on devices that meet any of the

specified conditions.

Note that if the equipment list was updated since the last time the task was executed, the task rerun will

include also all new devices that were not included in the previous list.

Action Description

View Opens the Task Report (see “The Task Report Window” on page 206) for the selected task activations instance.

Save Enables saving the Task Report for a selected task activations instance to an external file. Click to open the Save window, browse to a location in the file system, enter a name for the file and click Save.

Delete Deletes the selected task activations instance from the database of the management system.

Close Closes the Task Results window.

Figure 7-27: Previously Run Task Window

AlvariSTAR User Manual 209

Page 221: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.13 Network Scan Task

The Network Scan task is a system task (task type is Network Discovery) that scans the network

searching for new devices that meet certain criteria. The scope of the network address ranges to be

searched is defined in the Discovery manager (see “Discovery Manager” on page 166). The Network

Scan task can only be modified, not deleted.

In the Task Manager window, select the Network Scan task and click on the Edit option. If the task is

Inactive, the Network Discovery Task editor is displayed.

You can modify the Retries and Timeout SNMP Parameters of the task. The Discovery Settings are

read-only and can be modified only in the Discovery manager:

The Network Scan Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

To edit the Network Scan Task

Figure 7-28: Network Discovery Task Editor

Parameter Description

Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP communication.

The range is from 0 to 255.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 210

Page 222: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on

page 201).

7.4.14 Database Aging Tasks

The Database Aging tasks sets the maximum number of events shown in the Event History (See “Event

History Main Area” on page 105) and Audit Log (See “Audit Logs Main Area” on page 283) and enables

automating database management tasks. Database Aging tasks are system tasks and can only be

modified, not deleted.

There are two instances of tasks whose type is Database Aging:

Audit Log DAP

Event History DAP

In the Task Manager window, select either the Audit Log DAP task or the Event History DAP task and

click on the Edit option. If the task is Inactive, the Database Aging Task editor for the selected task is

displayed.

Timeout The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).

The available range is 1 to 3,600 seconds.

To edit a Database Aging Task:

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 211

Page 223: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The Database Aging Task window includes the following information in two tabs:

By default, Database Aging tasks are defined as never-ending recurring tasks to be executed every hour.

Figure 7-29: Database Aging Task Editor, Criteria Tab

Parameter Description

Criteria tab

Table Name The name of the table. Possible values are Event History (Event History DAP task) and Audit Logs (Audit Log DAP task), according to the task that was selected. This is a read only field and cannot be modified

Max Row Count The maximum number of relevant instances in the database.

Note: When the number of instances in the database exceeds the value entered in the Max Row Count field by 25%, an alarm is sent. When the number of events exceeds the value entered in the Max Row Count field by 50%, the oldest events are deleted so that the total number of events in the database equals the value defined in the Max Row Count field.

Actions tab

Secondary Storage File type of the archived records (see Destination below). Possible values are: None, CSV

Destination A disk location on the server file system for automatic archiving of relevant events. The default location is in the NMS server is: <Disk_Drive>:\<Management_System>/filesystem/archive.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 212

Page 224: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on

page 201).

7.4.15 LDAP Backup/File Aging Task

The LDAP Backup/File Aging task is used to backup files for the management system’s LDAP

(Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) information. The LDAP backup files contain details of Users and

User Profiles, enabling easy restore of this information. The LDAP Backup/File Aging task is a system

tasks and can only be modified, not deleted. The task creates periodical backup files of LDAP data and

deletes files that are considered as too old.

In the Task Manager select the LDAP Backup/File Aging task and click on the Edit option. If the task is

Inactive, the LDAP Backup/File Aging editor is displayed:

Use the Days Threshold field to define how much time backup files should be stored in the management

system. Older files will be removed.

By default, LDAP Backup/File Aging task is defined as a never-ending recurring task to be executed every

day.

Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on

page 201).

7.4.16 Configuration History Backup and Aging Task

To edit the LDAP Backup/File Aging Task:

Figure 7-30: The LDAP Backup/File Aging Editor

INFORMATION

The Configuration History Backup and Aging Task is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 213

Page 225: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The Configuration History Backup and Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining

Configuration History data in the database. Configuration History data is kept in the database to

support the Configuration History Request and Report feature (see “Configuration History Request and

Report” on page 59). The task is applicable for configuration history data of all relevant devices whose

Device Driver supports the Configuration History feature. This is a system task that cannot be deleted.

To open the Configuration History Backup and Aging Task Editor, select the task from the list of existing

tasks and click on the Edit option. If the task is Inactive, the Configuration History Aging Task editor is

displayed:

The Threshold Value parameter sets the maximum time in months to maintain the configuration history

data in the database. If when running the task there is configuration history data for which the elapsed

time since it was added to the database is higher than this value, this “old” data will be deleted from the

database and saved in the NMS server file system in

<Disk_Drive>:\<Management_System>/filesystem/AuditBackup.

The range is from 1 to 6 months. The default is 3 months.

By default, Configuration History Backup and Aging task is defined as a never-ending recurring task to

be executed every day.

Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on

page 201).

7.4.17 File Data Aging Tasks

The File Data Aging Task enables limiting the time for maintaining Performance Collection files in the

database (see also “Data Files Manager” on page 174. By default, the collected performance data is

saved in the management system’s database. In addition, the performance data xml files can be

Figure 7-31: Configuration History Aging Task Editor

INFORMATION File Data Aging task(s) are only if the installed Device Driver(s) include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion). The relevant tasks are:

COMPACT File Data Aging

4M File Data Aging

AlvariSTAR User Manual 214

Page 226: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

exported and saved in the management system’s server file system. The task enables limiting the time

that these files will be saved (in both places if applicable) to avoid allocation of too much disk space for

“old” data. This is a system task that cannot be deleted.

To open the File Data Aging Task Editor for a specific device family, select the relevant task from the list

of existing tasks and click on the Edit option. If the task is Inactive, the File Data Aging Task editor is

displayed:

The days-threshold parameter sets the maximum time to maintain files in the database (and in the

server’s file system if applicable). If the elapsed time since a file was added to the database is higher than

the value configures for the days-threshold parameter, the file will be deleted from the database (and

from the server’s file system if applicable).

Use the Editor controls as required (for details see “The Task Editor’s Controls and Indicators” on

page 201).

7.4.18 Mutual Neighboring Task

This section includes:

Introduction to the Mutual Neighboring Task

The Mutual Neighboring Task Editor

The Mutual Neighboring Task Report

Figure 7-32: File Data Aging Task Editor

INFORMATION

The Mutual Neighboring Task is available only if the installed Device Drivers include one or more Device Driver(s) for device families that support this feature (COMPACT and 4Motion).

The Mutual Neighboring Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 215

Page 227: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.18.1 Introduction to the Mutual Neighboring Task

In a properly configured system, neighboring definition between 2 Base Stations (BSs) must always be

mutual: if BS1 is defined as a neighbor of BS2, then BS2 must be defined as a neighbor of BS1. The

Mutual Neighboring Task enables checking consistency of neighboring BSs definition across the entire

Radio Access Network, reporting all non-mutual neighbors, and optionally fixing neighboring

definitions. It also enables updating all relevant neighbor parameters in all or selected BSs. This is a

system task that cannot be deleted.

To open the Mutual Neighboring task editor, select the task from the list of existing tasks and click on

the Edit option.If the task is Inactive, the Mutual Neighboring task editor is displayed:

7.4.18.2 The Mutual Neighboring Task Editor

The task editor includes the following components:

Operation

Data Retrieval

Find Panel

Figure 7-33: Mutual Neighboring Task Editor (with results)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 216

Page 228: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Results Table

Actions Panel

7.4.18.2.1 OperationThe Operation radio buttons enable defining the operation to be executed for the next run of the task,

as described below:

7.4.18.2.2 Data RetrievalThe Data Retrieval radio buttons enable defining the data retrieval mode for the next run of the task:

7.4.18.2.3 Find PanelFor general details on using the filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The criteria available for Advanced Filtering includes all parameters available in the Results table (see

below).

7.4.18.2.4 Results TableAfter running the task, the results table displays the results of the last run. Each entry represent a

neighboring definition and includes the following sortable and filterable parameters:

Option Description

Report All In the next run the task will load all the neighboring definitions from the network (see Data Retrieval below) and check all of them for mutuality. It will report all the results in a tabular view (see “Results Table” on page 217 below). This is the default mode.

Fix All In the next run the task will load all the neighboring definitions from the network (see “Data Retrieval” on page 217 below) and will check all of them for mutuality. If needed, it will try fixing all non-mutual definitions. In addition, it will attempt updating all relevant parameters in all BSs. It will report all the results in a tabular view (see “Results Table” on page 217 below).

Custom This mode enables the user to make selective operations per each neighboring definition presented in the Results Table after the last run, using a right click menu over the selected items (see details in “Actions Panel” on page 218 below).

Option Description

Database The neighboring definitions of all BSs in the entire Radio Access Network will be taken from the Management System’s database. This is the default mode.

Device The neighboring definitions will be taken from all relevant devices in the Radio Access Network.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 217

Page 229: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.18.2.5 Actions PanelExcept to Export operation, all the following operations are available only in Custom mode:

Parameter Description

Status The result of the operation executed in the last run: Completed or Failed.

Operation The neighboring definition operation: Report, Fix or Delete.

First BS ID The BS ID of the first BS in the pair tested for mutuality.

Second BS ID The BS ID of the second BS in the pair tested for mutuality.

First Location The Location defined in the database for the BTS of the first BS.

First Site The Name defined in the database for the BTS of the first BS.

First IP The Management IP Address of the BTS of the first BS.

Second Location The Location defined in the database for the BTS of the second BS.

Second Site The Name defined in the database for the BTS of the second BS.

Second IP The Management IP Address of the BTS of the second BS.

Operation Description

New Select to add a new Neighboring Definition entry. You will be prompted to specify two BS IDs and a Neighboring Operation between them - Report, Fix or Delete. The new definition will be added to the view, with the chosen Neighboring Operation pending for the next run of the task.

Remove Select to remove a Neighboring Definition from the view. This will not affect the actual Neighboring Definition in the devices/database. It will only remove the Neighboring Definition from the next run of the task in Custom mode.

Report Select to report the status of the selected Neighboring Definitions upon the next run of the task in Custom mode.

Fix Select to fix and/or update relevant parameters in the selected Neighboring Definitions upon the next run of the task in Custom mode

Delete Select to physically remove the selected Neighboring Definitions from the relevant devices/database upon the next run of the task in Custom mode.

Export Select to export details of selected entries to CSV file.

Import Select to import correct neighbors data from CSV in the following form:

<First_BS_ID>,<Second_BS_ID>[,<Operation>]

<Operation> Field can be Report, Fix or Delete. It can be ignored, in which case Report operation will be used by default.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 218

Page 230: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.18.3 The Mutual Neighboring Task Report

The report includes detailed results for all neighboring definitions, including operation (Report, Fix or

Delete) and failure reason for failed operations. For more details on using the Task Report’s control see

“The Task Report Window” on page 206.

7.4.19 Discovery Task

The Discovery Task enables to scan a single range of IP addresses searching for devices that meet certain

criteria whose IP address is not included in the current equipment database.

This section includes:

Creating a new Discovery Task

Editing an existing Discovery Task

7.4.19.1 Creating a new Discovery Task

This section includes:

Starting the Task Wizard

Figure 7-34: Mutual Neighboring Task Report

The Discovery Task is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility

AlvariSTAR User Manual 219

Page 231: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 1 (Create New Task)

Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 2 (Configure Task)

Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 3 (Finish Task)

7.4.19.1.1 Starting the Task Wizard

To create a new Discovery task, click on the New option in the Tasks Manager to open the first step of

the Task Wizard.

7.4.19.1.2 Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 1 (Create New Task)

Step 1 (Create New Task) of the wizard includes the following parameters:

To create a new Discovery Task:

Figure 7-35: Discovery Task Step 1 (Create New Task)

Parameter Description

Name The name of the task. A string of from 1 to 128 printable characters. The name must be unique in the system and cannot include the following characters: /,\,?,<,>,:,*,^,|,"

Description An optional description of the task.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 220

Page 232: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Click Next to apply the configuration and continue to next step.

7.4.19.1.3 Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 2 (Configure Task)

Step 2 (Configure Task) of the wizard includes the following parameters:

Category The task’s category. Currently only the Discovery Task option is available.

Created By Read-only. The name of the user creating the new task.

Figure 7-36: Discovery Task Step 2 (Configure Task)

Parameter Description

Task Name The name of the task. Read-only-taken from the Task Name configured in previous step.

Range Type The type of range definition: IP Range or Subnet. Select from the drop-down menu whether to define the range using IP Range (the first and last address in the range) or Subnet (Network and Mask). The default for a new entry is IP Range.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 221

Page 233: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Range Start The first IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet base address in a Subnet.

Range End/Subnet Mask

The last IP address in an IP Range or the Subnet Mask in a Subnet.

To minimize unnecessary traffic load in the network, avoid defining IP address ranges that include too many “gaps”, e.g., non existing addresses.

Location The optional location to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select location window allowing you to select a pre-configured location. For details refer to “The Select location Window” on page 103.

Contact The optional contact to be assigned to newly discovered devices whose IP address is in the range/subnet. Click on the Open Selector button to open the Select contact window allowing you to select a pre-configured contact. For details refer to “The Select contact Window” on page 193.

Retries The maximum number of retries for SNMP communication.

The range is from 0 to 255.

Timeout(s) The maximum time in seconds that the requesting process waits for a response before attempting a retransmission (or aborting if the maximum number of retries has been reached).

The available range is 1 to 3,600 seconds.

SNMP Version The SNMP protocol version used by the devices the NMS is attempting to discover. The available options are:

v1

v2c

v3

All products supported by the current release support version v2c. However, you may define either v1 or v2c - the management system will identify and use the correct version (v2c).

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 222

Page 234: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

Click Next to apply the configuration and continue to next step.

SNMP Credentials Use the Add and Remove buttons to populate the SNMP Credentials. At least one set of credentials must be defined. The type of credentials differ, depending on the SNMP version.

For SNMP v1 and v2c, fill in the read/write community table:

Read Community - SNMP Read community to be used by discovery when accessing devices in the range.

Write Community - The SNMP Write community to be used when accessing discovered devices in the range.

For SNMP v3, the following credentials apply:

Username - Username used for authentication

Security Level - Authentication and privacy settings

» NoAuth_NoPriv - Both authentication and privacy are disabled

» Auth_NoPriv - Authentication is enabled and privacy is disabled

» Auth_Priv - Both authentication and privacy are enabled

Authentication Algorithm - Hashing algorithm applied to the authentication password

» MD5 - Message-Digest algorithm 5

» SHA - Secure Hash Algorithm

Authentication Password - Password used for authentication. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.

Privacy Algorithm - Encryption standard used for data transmission

» AES - Uses the Advanced Encryption Standard

» DES - Uses the Data Encryption Standard

Privacy Password - Encryption key used by the privacy algorithm. At least 8 printable characters. For security reasons the password is displayed as a string of *.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 223

Page 235: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.19.1.4 Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 3 (Finish Task)

Step 3 (Finish Task) of the wizard includes the following parameters:

Figure 7-37: Discovery Task Step 3 (Finish Task)

Parameter Description

Finish Action The action to be performed after finishing task creation:

none (the default): No action except adding the new task to the Task Manager (after clicking on the Finish button).

run now: Add the task to the Task Manager and run it.

schedule: Add the task to the task manager and open the Schedule Editor (See “The Task Scheduler” on page 203) for scheduling the task.

show runtime results Available only if selected Finish Action is run now. If selected (marked), the Runtime Result window (See “The Runtime Results Window” on page 205) will open when the task starts running.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 224

Page 236: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.19.2 Editing an existing Discovery Task

To edit an existing Discovery Task, select the Task from the list and click on the Edit option. If the task is

Inactive, the Discovery Task Editor for the selected task will open.

The Discovery Task editor includes exactly the same parameters as in Step 2 (Configure Task) of the

Task Wizard when creating a new Discovery Task (see “Creating a new Discovery Task - Step 2

(Configure Task)” on page 221. The only difference is that the Task Name can be modified: The Task

Name is a string of up to 128 printable characters that must be unique in the system and cannot

include the following characters: /,\,?,<,>,:,*,^,|,":

7.4.20 Multiple Configuration Task

This section includes:

The Multiple Configuration Task

The BS Selector

Figure 7-38: Discovery Task Editor

AlvariSTAR User Manual 225

Page 237: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

7.4.20.1 The Multiple Configuration Task

The template based Multiple Configuration task enables modifying the configuration of selected devices

using a pre-prepared template. For details on templates and how they are used to modify configuration

of target objects refer to “The Configuration Templates Manager” on page 84.

To create a new task from the Template Manager select the template you want to use and click on the

Apply option to open the Multiple Configuration Task editor. By default the task editor will include the

selected template as the Equipment Template.

To create a new task from the Equipment Manager, select the target device(s) and click on the Multiple

Configuration option. All selected devices must be of the same Type. The Template Selector will open,

displaying only templates for the relevant equipment type, enabling selection of the template to be used

(see “The Template Selector Window” on page 88). Select the template to use and click Apply to open

the Multiple Configuration Task editor. By default the task editor will include the selected template as

the Equipment Template and all selected devices will be included in the Equipment Selector table. For a

BS template, all BSs of each of the selected devices will be included.

To open an existing task, select an existing Multiple Configuration task from the list and click on the Edit

option. If the task is Inactive, the Multiple Configuration Task Editor for the selected task is displayed.

In the Local CRAFT Utility, the Multiple Configuration Task is applicable only to the managed device.

To open the Multiple Configuration Task Editor:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 226

Page 238: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The Multiple Configuration Task editor comprises the following fields:

Figure 7-39: Multiple Configuration Task Editor

Parameter Description

Name The name of the task. A string of 1 to 128 printable characters. The name must be unique and cannot include the following characters: /,\,?,<,>,:,*,^,|,".

Description An optional free text field providing a general description of the task. When the task is opened from the Configurations Template manager, the default description is “Multiple configuration task based on template: <template_name>”.

Equipment Template The default is the template selected during the process of creating a new task, or the previously defined template in an existing task. You can use the Open Selector button to open the Template Selector and select the template you want to use from the list of all previously defined templates. For details refer to “The Template Selector Window” on page 88.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 227

Page 239: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The Equipment Selector table includes the following details for each device participating in the task:

Click Add to open the Selector window, allowing you to add objects to the Equipment table (For a task

using a BS template, see details in The BS Selector below. For tasks using other MO types, see The

Equipment Selector Window). Each template is associated with specific Equipment Type, MO Type and

Release Number. The available objects in the selector are those with Equipment Type and Release

Number matching those of the selected template.

Click Remove to remove one or several selected objects from the table. To select/de-select multiple

objects you can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. For a task

configured to use a BS template, use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs on the left side of each BTS object

to view/hide its BSs, allowing also removal of specific BSs.

7.4.20.2 The BS Selector

The BS Selector enables to select objects for a BS template based Multiple Configuration Task.

To open the BS Selector, click on the Add button in the task editor for a BS template based Multiple

Configuration Task:

Preview Only Select to define a preview task. Preview option allows getting the full report without performing any actual modification to the devices. All validation rules are verified. This enables the user to gain confidence on performing the multiple configuration task. Typically the user will run the multiple configuration task without preview when he has no more errors in the Preview task report.

Parameter Description

Name The name of the device (for a BS template based task use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs on the left side to view/hide selected BS ID LSBs).

SW Version The running SW version of the device.

IP Address The IP address of the device.

State The operational state of the device

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 228

Page 240: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

The grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently available BTSs with Equipment

Type and Release Number matching those of the selected template.

Use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs on the left side of each BTS object to view/hide its BSs,

The read-only information displayed for each entry includes:

You can use the filtering options in the search/filter panel to display only objects that meet certain

criteria. For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on

page 12.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

BS ID LSB

Name

BTS Number

Software Version

IP Address

Figure 7-40: BS Selector

Parameter Description

Name The name of the device, or the name of the BS as configured in the device for a BS object in a BS template based task.

BTS Number/BS ID LSB The BTS Number for a BTS object, or the BS ID LSB for a BS object.

IP Address The management IP address of the device (applicable only for a BTS object).

State The operational state of the device (applicable only for a BTS object).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 229

Page 241: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementThe Tasks ManagerChapter 7 - Management The Tasks Manager

To select/de-select multiple objects you can use the traditional Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click

selection/de-selection methods.

Select the required object(s) and click Apply. The selector will be closed and the selected object(s) will be

added to the Equipment Selector table in the Multiple Configuration Task editor.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 230

Page 242: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5 Preferences Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Preferences Manager

Application Configuration

NBI Notifications

Map

Homepage

7.5.1 Introduction to the Preferences Manager

The Preferences Manager enables management of various types of general parameters that affect

functionality of other managers/management applications.

Select Management > Preferences from the Main Menu. The Preferences tab is added to the tabs ribbon

and the Preferences Manager is displayed.

When opened for the first time, the configuration section is empty and only the function selector on the

left side of the screen is available:

Use the function selector on the left side of the screen to select the required option:

Application Configuration

NBI Notifications

Map

Homepage

To open the User Preferences Manager

Figure 7-41: The Preferences Manager, Function Selector Panel

AlvariSTAR User Manual 231

Page 243: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.2 Application Configuration

The Application Configuration node enables configuring parameters related to communication with

other management applications. Use the expand/collapse (+/-) signs to view/hide the following options:

StarQuality

StarACS

CSR

7.5.2.1 StarQuality

CAUTION For properly supporting operation with the Portal, the StarQuality must have a license for support of SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol).

All sites discovered and managed by AlvariSTAR should also be monitored by StarQuality.

Figure 7-42: Preferences Manager - Application Configuration - StarQuality

AlvariSTAR User Manual 232

Page 244: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

1 Select the Yes option for Configured.

2 In the IP Address field, enter the StarQuality’s IP Address.

3 In the HTTP Port field, enter the StarQuality’s HTTP port number (the default is 80).

4 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the StarQuality (the default is

portal, with Read-Only privileges).

5 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the

StarQuality (the default is portal123). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of *

characters.

1 In the Host Address field, enter the IP address of the database.

2 In the Port field, enter the HTTP port number (the default is 1521).

3 In the Database Name field, enter the configured name of the database (the default is sq).

4 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the database (the default is sq).

5 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the

database (the default is sq). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of * characters.

6 Click on the Test Connection button to check the connection to the database. If there is an error

message, try to correct parameters or check the route to the database.

7 Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply the configuration.

To configure the StarQuality application parameters:

To configure the Database Connections parameters for StarQuality:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 233

Page 245: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.2.2 StarACS

1 Select the Yes option for Configured.

2 In the IP field, enter the StarACS’s IP Address.

3 In the HTTP Port field, enter the StarACS’s HTTP port number (the default is 80).

4 In the JNP Port field, enter the StarACS’s JNP port number (the default is 1099).

Figure 7-43: Preferences Manager - Application Configuration - StarACS

To configure the StarACS application parameters:

To configure the Database Connections parameters for StarACS:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 234

Page 246: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

1 In the Database Type field select the database Type: Oracle or MySQL.

2 In the Host Address field, enter the IP address of the database.

3 In the Port field, enter the HTTP port number (the default is 1521 for Oracle, 3306 for MySQL).

4 In the Database Name field, enter the configured name of the database (the default is dps).

5 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the database (the default is dps).

6 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the

database (the default is dps). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of * characters.

7 Click on the Test Connection button to check the connection to the database. If there is an error

message, try to correct parameters or check the route to the database.

8 Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply the configuration.

7.5.2.3 CSR

Figure 7-44: Preferences Manager - Application Configuration - CSR

AlvariSTAR User Manual 235

Page 247: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

1 Select the Yes option for Configured.

2 In the IP Address field, enter the StarACS’s IP Address (CSR application should be installed on the

StarACS server).

3 In the HTTP Port field, enter the StarACS’s HTTP port number (the default is 80).

4 In the Username field, enter the Username to be used for login to the CSR application (the default is

admin).

5 In the Password field, enter the Password to be used with the specified Username for login to the CSR

application (the default is admin). For security reasons the Password is displayed as a string of *

characters.

6 Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply the configuration.

7.5.3 NBI Notifications

The NBI Notifications section enables configuration of parameters to be used by all enabled NBI Events

Forwarding instances (see “NBI Events Forwarding Manager” on page 116). These include parameter of

synchronization notifications sent by the management system to a higher-hierarchy manager and

selection of traps types to be forwarded.

To configure the CSR application parameters:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 236

Page 248: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

The following settings are available:

Figure 7-45: Preferences Manager - NBI Notifications

Parameter Description

Notifications

Keep Alive Sends keep alive notifications at predefined time intervals as long as the NMS server is active. Select to enable, de-select to disable. The default is selected (enabled)

Interval (minutes) Defines the time interval (in minutes) between successive keep alive notifications. Use the text box to enter the desired value. The default is 3 minutes.

Server Started Sends a notification message when the server has started up. Select to enable, de-select to disable.The default is selected (enabled)

Server Shutdown Sends a notification message when the server is shutting down. Select to enable, de-select to disable.The default is selected (enabled)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 237

Page 249: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply changes.

Event Types

Send Original Traps/Send NMS Events

Select the Send Original Traps option to forward traps in their original format, just as they are received from the managed equipment. This is the default.

Select the Send NMS Events option to send messages created by the management system according to definitions in relevant templates instead of original traps.

INFORMATION

In order to enable synchronization with the management system, the following RW parameters must be configured in the higher-hierarchy manager:

Parameter Description

sendOperationalAlarms Enables/Disables alarm synchronization. The following values apply:

0 - Synchronization disabled

1 - Synchronization enabled

2 - Synchronization based on a custom time interval

3 - Synchronization based on a custom SeqNo interval

opAlarmsCustomIntervalStart Interval start for custom time/SeqNo interval based synchronization

opAlarmsCustomIntervalEnd Interval end for custom time/SeqNo interval based synchronization

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 238

Page 250: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.4 Map

The Map configuring screen enables configuring parameter related to KPIs (Key Performance Indicators)

to be used for presentation of sector on a geographical map (see “Key Performance Indicators” on

page 34). It also enables managing import/export actions related to geolocation information of

BTSs/MSs.

The Map screen includes the following sections:

Sector’s Color based on KPI

MS Coordinates Import

Import/Export GPS Data

7.5.4.1 Sector’s Color based on KPI

This section enables defining the KPIs (Key Performance Indicators) to be used for displaying BS’s sector

color on the map. For details on the meaning of each color in accordance with the relevant KPI) value

refer to “Key Performance Indicators” on page 34.

A different KPI may be selected for each product family.

KPIs for 4Motion/COMPACT devices are based on information recorded in StarQuality for the last

15-minutes period for which there is available data regarding the relevant BS. The available options are:

Figure 7-46: Preferences Manager - Map

AlvariSTAR User Manual 239

Page 251: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

DL Air Link Utilization, Data Zone

SINR Distribution Downlink - SINR (SINR distribution Downlink less than 5dB)

DL Throughput Total

KPIs for Extreme devices are based on real-time counters taken by the management system every 5

minutes from each device using SNMP. The available options are:

Click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the screen to apply changes.

7.5.4.2 MS Coordinates Import

This section includes:

The MS Coordinates File

Importing an MS Coordinates File

The Geolocation and Bing Tasks

Table 7-1: Extreme KPI Details

KPI Description

UL NACK Uplink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:

UL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames= number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

DL NACK Downlink NACK rate. Computed using the following formula:

DL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

NACK Frames=number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames= number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

NACK DL UL Ratios The maximum value of UL NACK and DL NACK (described above).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 240

Page 252: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.4.2.1 The MS Coordinates FileThe MS Coordinates Import utility enables loading to the system MS coordinates files with MS(s) location

details. These location details may be used to display the an MS in its geolocation.

An MS location details may specify either its geolocation (latitude/longitude) or its full address.

The system accepts files with MS(s) location details that meet the following rules:

1 The file is a text file, parameters are comma separated.

2 Each line describes one MS, and can have a variable length.

3 A line always starts with an MS’s Serial Number. The Serial Number must be a valid one (exists in the

ACS database).

4 The second parameter in each line is either "ADDR" or "LATLONG" (case-insensitive), defining the

type of location information to be provided by the following parameters.

5 If the second parameter is "LATLONG", the rest of the line should contain two floating point numbers

or degrees:minutes:seconds, defining latitude and longitude. If no latitude and longitude details

follow "LATLONG", the system assumes the user wants to delete the latitude and longitude

information in the system (if available) for the specific MS.

6 If the second parameter is "ADDR", the line should contain the following parameters:

a Country

b State (required only if the country is US)

c City

d Rest of the address

If no address details follow "ADDR", the system assumes the user wants to delete the address

information in the system (if available) for the specific MS.

The utility offers the option of using Bing Spatial Data Services to try resolving the latitude/longitude

coordinates of “ADDR” MSs.

7.5.4.2.2 Importing an MS Coordinates File

1 Click on the Open Selector icon next to the Import File field. The Open window will open:

To load an MS Coordinates File:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 241

Page 253: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

2 Browse to the required location and select the pre-prepared file.

3 Click Open. The selected file details will be displayed in the Import File field.

4 Click on the Import button to create a new Geolocation Task (see The Geolocation and Bing Tasks

below) and open the task’s window. The new task will be added to the tasks list in the Geolocations

Tasks table below and in the Tasks manager. If the file includes ADDR lines, then the Geolocation task

will initiate a Bing task trying to resolve the latitude/longitude coordinates using Bing Spatial Data

Services.

The Geolocation Tasks table provide status details on created Geolocation tasks. It also provides status

details for created Bing tasks. These tasks can be deleted from the Task Manager.

The Update entry provide the date and time of updating the ACS database (applicable only for Bing

tasks).

Click on the View Report option to view the task’s report (not applicable for a task which was never

run).

7.5.4.2.3 The Geolocation and Bing Tasks

Figure 7-47: Import MS Coordinates File

Figure 7-48: Geolocation Task

AlvariSTAR User Manual 242

Page 254: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

Figure 7-49: Geolocation Task Report

Figure 7-50: Bing Task

AlvariSTAR User Manual 243

Page 255: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

The Geolocation and Bing tasks cannot be edited. They provide read-only information of the Task Name:

Geolocation Task #<number) or Bing Task #<number>, where the number is generated automatically by

the management system. In a Geolocation task the read-only details of the Uploaded File are also

available (not applicable for a Bing task).

A Bing task will be activated by a Geolocation task only if the file includes at least one valid ADDR entry.

A Geolocation task created from the Preferences manager may be executed later (or again) from the

Tasks manager. A Bing task may also be executed again from the Tasks manager. From the Tasks

manager you can also delete these tasks.

For each address successfully resolved by a Bing task the latitude/longitude parameters of the MS in the

ACS database will be updated.

If the geolocation service returned zero results or more than one result, only the address information is

stored on the management system. You may try later to resolve the geolocation of such MSs one by one

(see“Switching to Map View for a selected MS” on page 150 and “Editing MS Location Details” on

page 151).

If the file includes only LATLONG entries the Geolocation task will update the latitude/longitude

parameters of relevant MSs in the ACS database without initiating a Bing task.

Figure 7-51: Bing Task Report

AlvariSTAR User Manual 244

Page 256: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.4.3 Import/Export GPS Data

This section includes the following options:

Import Site Coordinates

Export Site Coordinates

7.5.4.3.1 Import Site CoordinatesThe Import Site Coordinates function enables importing a previously generated backup file that contains

the location details for devices that do not support GPS.

Click on the Import Site Coordinates’s Open Selector icon to open the Import File Coordinates window:

To import a file with sites coordinates information, browse to the required location, select the file you

want to import and click on the Import button. The location details of all discovered devices in the

database that do not use GPS and are included in the imported file will be updated (if applicable) with

information from the file.

NOTE! Bing Spatial Data Services may not be available due to one of the following reasons:

Another user is running a Bing Spatial Data Services job. There can be only one running job at a time per server.

The maximum number of jobs has been reached. The maximum number of jobs is limited to 50 jobs per 24 hours per a Bing Maps Key (account). The management system has a single Bing Maps Key.

To import a Site Coordinates File:

Figure 7-52: Import Site Coordinates

AlvariSTAR User Manual 245

Page 257: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.4.3.2 Export Site CoordinatesThe Export Site Coordinates function enables generating a backup file that contains the location details

defined in the Network Element Editor for each device that does not support GPS.

Click on the Export Site Coordinates’s Save icon to open the Import File Coordinates window:

To export a file with the current sites coordinates information, define the file name, browse to the

desired location and click on the Export button.

To export a Site Coordinates File:

Figure 7-53: Export Site Coordinates

AlvariSTAR User Manual 246

Page 258: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.5 Homepage

The Homepage screen enables selection of the charts/graphs to be displayed in the Home Page (see

“The Home Page” on page 17). The available options depend on the installed management

applications.

Most of the charts/graphs provide the variation over time (current value and value one hour/one day

ago). If the current value differs from previous value, an arrow will indicate whether the value increased

(green) or decreased (red).

Mouse hovering over any active area of a chart triggers the display of the legend and actual value of the

area under mouse hovering.

After completing selection of charts/graphs, click on the Apply button in the right bottom corner of the

screen to apply changes.

The available options for each of the six zones available in the Home Page (the same chart/graph cannot

be selected more than once) include:

Options that are available always:

Figure 7-54: Preferences Manager - Homepage

AlvariSTAR User Manual 247

Page 259: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

Available options if StarQuality Is available:

Available options if StarACS Is available:

7.5.5.1 Options that are available always:

BTSs Management Chart / hourly

BTSs Management Chart / daily

Open Alarms - Critical / hourly

Open Alarms - Critical / daily

BTSs with Critical Alarm / hourly

BTSs with Critical Alarm / daily

BTSs SW Versions Chart

7.5.5.1.1 BTSs Management Chart / hourlyDescription: A pie-chart of BTS management status (Managed, Unreachable, Unknown, Unlicensed,

Unmanageable, Unmanaged) distribution, plus variation details over the last hour.

Units of measurement: Percentage, up to 2 decimal points.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.1.2 BTSs Management Chart / dailyDescription: A pie-chart of BTS management status (Managed, Unreachable, Unknown, Unlicensed,

Unmanageable, Unmanaged) distribution, plus variation details over the last day.

Units of measurement: Percentage, up to 2 decimal points.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.1.3 Open Alarms - Critical / hourlyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current total number of open critical alarms, plus

variation details over the last hour.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.1.4 Open Alarms - Critical / dailyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current total number of open critical alarms, plus

variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.1.5 BTSs with Critical Alarm / hourlyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current number of BTSs with open critical alarms,

plus variation details over the last hour.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 248

Page 260: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.5.1.6 BTSs with Critical Alarm / dailyDescription: A dial-meter gauge indicator showing the current number of BTSs with open critical alarms,

plus variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.1.7 BTSs SW Versions ChartDescription: A pie chart of BTSs SW versions distribution.

Units of measurement: Percentage, up to 2 decimal points.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.2 Available options if StarQuality Is available:

Number of Registered MSs / hourly

Number of Registered MSs / daily

BSs with more than 50 MSs / hourly

BSs with more than 50 MSs / daily

BSs with more than 90 MSs / hourly

BSs with more than 90 MSs / daily

Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / hourly

Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / daily

Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / hourly

Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / daily

MSs Online (SQ) / hourly

MSs Online (SQ) / daily

7.5.5.2.1 Number of Registered MSs / hourlyDescription: The number of registered MSs at the current time - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus

variation details over the last hour.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.2.2 Number of Registered MSs / dailyDescription: The number of registered MSs at the current time - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus

variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 2 minutes.

7.5.5.2.3 BSs with more than 50 MSs / hourlyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 50 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus

variation details over the last hour.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 249

Page 261: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.4 BSs with more than 50 MSs / dailyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 50 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus

variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.5 BSs with more than 90 MSs / hourlyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 90 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus

variation details over the last hour.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.6 BSs with more than 90 MSs / dailyDescription: The number of BSs serving more than 90 active MSs - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus

variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.7 Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / hourlyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last hour an average ALU

(Downlink Air Link Utilization) lower than 20% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over

the last hour.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.8 Number of Sites With Low ALU (20%) / dailyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last day an average ALU

(Downlink Air Link Utilization) lower than 20% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over

the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.9 Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / hourlyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last hour an average ALU

(Downlink Air Link Utilization) higher than 95% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details

over the last hour.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.10 Number of Sites With High ALU (95%) / dailyDescription: The number of BTSs with at least one BS having during the last day an average ALU

(Downlink Air Link Utilization) higher than 95% - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details

over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 250

Page 262: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 7 - ManagementPreferences ManagerChapter 7 - Management Preferences Manager

7.5.5.2.11 MSs Online (SQ) / hourlyDescription: The number "Active" MSs (for which wStarQuality collected at least 1 KPI sample during

the last 24 hours) - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over the last hour.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.2.12 MSs Online (SQ) / dailyDescription: The number "Active" MSs (for which StarQuality collected at least 1 KPI sample during the

last 24 hours) - shown as a dial-meter gauge, plus variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.3 Available options if StarACS Is available:

MSs Online (ACS) / daily

Number of MSs With More Than 3 Reboots (ACS) / daily

Newly Registered MSs (ACS) / daily

7.5.5.3.1 MSs Online (ACS) / dailyDescription: For each day, if a MS had at least one activity logged into the main facts table of StarACS,

the MS is considered to have been online for the whole day. The current number of “online” MSs

(contacted the StarACS server at least once during the current day) is shown as a dial-meter gauge

gauge indicator, plus variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.3.2 Number of MSs With More Than 3 Reboots (ACS) / dailyDescription: The current number of MSs that rebooted more than three times during the current day is

shown as a dial-meter gauge indicator, plus variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

7.5.5.3.3 Newly Registered MSs (ACS) / dailyDescription: The current number of newly registered MSs (MSs that registered during the last day) is

shown as a dial-meter gauge indicator, plus variation details over the last day.

Refresh time: 15 minutes.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 251

Page 263: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - Administration

In This Chapter:

“Users Manager” on page 253

“User Profiles Manager” on page 269

“User Sessions Manager” on page 279

“The Audit Logs Manager” on page 282

“Licenses Manager” on page 285

“Password Policy Manager” on page 290

“User Domain Manager” on page 293

“External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295

Page 264: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1 Users Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Users Manager

Users Main Area

User Details Panels

Users Actions Panel

Find Users Panel

Creating a new User

Editing an existing User

Reset Password

The User Selector

8.1.1 Introduction to the Users Manager

The Users Manager displays information on the currently configured users and associated properties and

enables creating new users and editing the properties of existing users.

By default, the system is provided with several default users with assigned default user profiles:

The default users cannot be deleted, and the default user profiles assigned to them cannot be removed.

Select Administration > Users from the Main Menu. The Users tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the

Users Manager is displayed.

Default User Name Default User Profile

admin Administrator

manager Managers

observer Observers

To open the Users Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 253

Page 265: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1.2 Users Main Area

The Users grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured users.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each user includes:

:

8.1.3 User Details Panels

The User Details section is applicable only for s single selected user and it includes the following tabs:

User Details General Tab

Figure 8-1: The Users Manager Table

Parameter Description

Username The name of the logged in user

Display Name The configured user’s Last Name

User State User current state:

Active: Normal state

Activation Waiting: The Account Activation Date has not been reached yet.

Suspended: A user with a suspended account cannot login until the administrator will change its state to Active.

Blocked: Number of failed login attempts has been reached and the user has been blocked.

Password Expired: The password expiration date has been reached. For more details refer to “Security Info Tab” on page 264.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 254

Page 266: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

User Details Security Tab

User Details Locations Tab

8.1.3.1 User Details General Tab

The General tab displays the details configured in the User Editor General tab (see “General Tab” on

page 262), plus User Profile Membership as configured in the User Editor User Profile tab (see “User

Profile Tab” on page 266).

8.1.3.2 User Details Security Tab

The Security tab displays the details configured in the User Editor Security Info tab (see “Security Info

Tab” on page 264)

Figure 8-2: User Details General Tab

Figure 8-3: User Details Security Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 255

Page 267: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1.3.3 User Details Locations Tab

The Locations tab displays the list of locations assigned to the user. A user can manage (subject to

permissions assigned to the specific user) only locations assigned to the specific user (or all locations if

the Locations List is empty). For more details see “User Domain Manager” on page 293.

8.1.4 Users Actions Panel

The Users Actions panel includes the following options:

Figure 8-4: User Details Locations Tab

Option Action

New Adds a new user to the database. Opens the User Editor, allowing to define properties of the user to be created. For more details, see “Creating a new User” on page 257.

Edit Not available if two or more users are selected. Opens the User Editor for the selected user, allowing to edit some of the user’s properties. For more details, see “Editing an existing User” on page 262.

Delete Not available for default users. Deletes the selected user(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation.

Reset Password Not available if two or more users are selected. Opens the Reset Password window, allowing to configure a new password for the user. For more details see “Reset Password” on page 267.

The Reset Password action may also be used to re-activate a suspended user whose old password has expired.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 256

Page 268: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1.5 Find Users Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search is performed on all columns.

The Pre-Defined Filtering option is not available for users.

Advanced Filter includes the following criteria:

Username

Display Name

User State

8.1.6 Creating a new User

Click on the New option in the Actions panel. The User editor for a new User opens, displaying the first

(General) step:

1 First Step (General)

To create a new User

AlvariSTAR User Manual 257

Page 269: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

The General Step includes the following parameters:

Figure 8-5: The User Editor for a new User, First (General) Step

Parameter Description

User Name The name of the user. A string of 1 to 32 printable characters. Should contain only lower case characters and numbers. Must be a unique name.

First Name An optional information field providing the user’s first name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.

Middle Name An optional information field providing the user’s middle name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.

Last Name The user’s last name. A string of 0 to 32 characters. The last name is used as the Display String parameter in the Users table. If no last name is defined, the default after completing the new User creation will be the defined User Name.

Description An optional information field providing a description of the user. A string of 0 to 128 characters.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 258

Page 270: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

Configure the mandatory User Name. You may configure other optional parameters. Click Next to open

the second (Security Info) step.

2 Second Step (Security Info)

Organization An optional information field providing details of the user’s organization. A string of 0 to 32 characters.

Address An optional information field providing details of the user’s address. A string of 0 to 255 characters.

E-mail An optional information field providing the user’s e-mail address. Must be in the correct format.

Telephone An optional information field providing the user’s telephone details.

Cellular An optional information field providing the user’s cellular phone details.

Pager An optional information field providing the user’s pager details.

Figure 8-6: The User Editor for a new User, Second (Security Info) Step

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 259

Page 271: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

The Security Info Step includes the following parameters:

Configure the mandatory Password and confirm it. You may configure a future Account Activation Date

and change the default setting for the Password never expire option. Click Next to open the third (User

Profile) step.

3 Third Step (User Profile)

Parameter Description

User Name Read-only. Taken from the previous step.

Password A string of 5 to 32 printable character. Password is mandatory. The password must adhere to the password policy constraints (see “Password Policy Manager” on page 290).

Confirm Password Re-enter the password.

Password Creation Date When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.

Password Expiration Date When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.

Account Activation Date The date at which this account becomes effective (Active). This field lets you create accounts in advance. The accounts remain with Activation Waiting status until the specified activation date.

The default activation date is the current date, meaning the account will become effective immediately. Specify a different date using one of the following options:

Enter required date directly in the text field (or edit required components of current date), in the proper format (by default: MM/DD/YY).

Click the down arrow on the right side of the field and select a date from the calendar graphic display.

Password Never Expires When selected, the user’s password will not expire, regardless of the password policy.

Login Attempts When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.

Last Login Time When creating a new user this read-only field is empty.

User State Active or Activation Waiting.

When creating a new user without changing the default Account Activation Date (current date), the default state is Active, meaning that the new user can login immediately after finishing its creation.

When creating a new user and changing the Account Activation Date to a future time, the default state is Activation Waiting. It will change to Active at the specified activation date and time.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 260

Page 272: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

The User Profile Step contains two tables:

Available User Profiles: All the currently available user profiles.

User Profile Membership: All the user profiles assigned to the user. When the User Profile step is

opened for the first time this table is empty.

Use the >, >>, <, and << buttons to move selected user profiles between the two tables:

Figure 8-7: The User Editor for a new User, Third (User Profile) Step

To Do This:

Assign or remove one profile to the user

1 Select a profile from the left pane (Available User Profiles)

2 Click the right-arrow (>) button to move the profile into the right pane (Profile Membership), or left-arrow (<) to remove.

Assign or remove multiple profiles

1 Ctrl+click to select multiple items or click on one item and Shift-click on another to select a range of consecutive items

2 Click the right-arrow (>) or left-arrow (<).

Assign or remove all profiles to the user

Click the double-right-arrow (>>) or double-left-arrow (<<) button

AlvariSTAR User Manual 261

Page 273: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

When assignment of user profiles to the new user is completed, click Finish.

8.1.7 Editing an existing User

Select a User and click on the Edit option in the Actions panel. The User editor for an existing user

opens. The User editor for an existing user has three tabs:

General Tab

Security Info Tab

User Profile Tab

After performing any changes in one or some tabs, click on the OK button to save the changes.

8.1.7.1 General Tab

To edit an existing User

Figure 8-8: The User Editor General Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 262

Page 274: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

The General tab includes the following parameters:

You may edit any of the parameters, excluding the read-only User Name.

Parameter Description

User Name Read-only. The User Name as defined when created.

First Name An optional information field providing the user’s first name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.

Middle Name An optional information field providing the user’s middle name. A string of 0 to 32 characters.

Last Name The user’s last name. A string of 0 to 32 characters. The last name is used as the Display String parameter in the Users table.The default is the defined User Name.

Description An optional information field providing a description of the user. A string of 0 to 128 characters.

Organization An optional information field providing details of the user’s organization. A string of 0 to 32 characters.

Address An optional information field providing details of the user’s address. A string of 0 to 255 characters.

E-mail An optional information field providing the user’s e-mail address. Must be in the correct format.

Telephone An optional information field providing the user’s telephone details.

Cellular An optional information field providing the user’s cellular phone details.

Pager An optional information field providing the user’s pager details.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 263

Page 275: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1.7.2 Security Info Tab

The Security Info tab includes the following parameters:

Figure 8-9: The User Editor Security Info Tab

Parameter Description

User Name Read-only.

Password Not displayed for security reasons. The password cannot be edited here. To change the password use the Reset Password action (see “Password Policy Manager” on page 290)

Confirm Password Empty (see Password above).

Password Creation Date Read-only. The date and time at which the password was defined.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 264

Page 276: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

Password Expiration Date Read-only. The date and time at which the password will expire.

If the Password never expires check-box (see below) is selected, this field will be empty. Otherwise it will display expiration date according to current password policy constraints (see “Password Policy Manager” on page 290). The default is 3 months from creation date.

Account Activation Date Read-only. The date at which this account became or will become effective (Active).

Password Never Expires When selected, the user’s password will not expire, regardless of the password policy.

Login Attempts Read-only. The number of failed login attempts.

Last Login Time Read-only. The last date and time at which the user logged in.

User State The available options are:

Active

Activation Waiting: The Account Activation Date has not been reached yet. This status cannot be changed.

Suspended: a user with a suspended account cannot login until the administrator will change its state to Active.

Blocked: Number of failed login attempts has been reached and the user has been blocked. The Administrator can change the status to Active. Otherwise the user must reload the client before attempting login again.

Password Expired: The password expiration date has been reached.

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 265

Page 277: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1.7.3 User Profile Tab

The User Profile tab contains two tables:

Available User Profiles: All the currently available user profiles.

User Profile Membership: All the user profiles assigned to the user.

Use the >, >>, <, and << buttons to move selected user profiles between the two tables:

Figure 8-10: The User Editor User Profile Tab

To Do This:

Assign or remove one profile to the user

1 Select a profile from the left pane (Available User Profiles)

2 Click the right-arrow (>) button to move the profile into the right pane (Profile Membership), or left-arrow (<) to remove.

Assign or remove multiple profiles

1 Ctrl+click to select multiple items or click on one item and Shift-click on another to select a range of consecutive items

2 Click the right-arrow (>) or left-arrow (<).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 266

Page 278: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

The User Profile Membership of a default user cannot be edited.

8.1.8 Reset Password

To change a n existing user’s password, select the user and click on the Reset Password action.

1 Enter the new password (5-32 characters)

2 Confirm the new password.

3 Click Finish to save the new password.

Refer to “Password Policy Manager” on page 290 for details on passwords policy including password

constraints.

Assign or remove all profiles to the user

Click the double-right-arrow (>>) or double-left-arrow (<<) button

Figure 8-11: Reset Password Window

To change the password:

To Do This:

AlvariSTAR User Manual 267

Page 279: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUsers ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Users Manager

8.1.9 The User Selector

The User Selector window opens when selecting the Add option in the User Profile Editor General tab

when editing an existing User Profile, or in the first step when defining a new User Profile.

The User Selector displays the details of all currently defined users (for details see “Users Main Area” on

page 254). You may use the Find Users panel to search for specific user(s). For details see “Find Users

Panel” on page 257. Select one or several users and click on the Apply button. The selected user(s) will

now be included in the users table.

Figure 8-12: The User Selector

INFORMATION

Default users cannot be added to the users table.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 268

Page 280: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

8.2 User Profiles Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the User Profiles Manager

User Profiles Main Area

User Profile Details Panels

User Profiles Actions Panel

Find User Profiles Panel

Creating a new User Profile

Editing an existing User Profile

8.2.1 Introduction to the User Profiles Manager

The User Profiles Manager displays information on the currently configured user profiles and associated

properties and enables creating new user profiles, editing the properties of existing user profiles,

deleting user profiles and assigning user profiles to users.

By default, the system is provided with several user profiles:

Administrators (admin)

Observers

Managers

Map Users

The default user profiles cannot be deleted.

Select Administration > User Profiles from the Main Menu. The User Profiles tab is added to the tabs

ribbon and the User Profiles Manager is displayed.

To open the User Profiles Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 269

Page 281: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

8.2.2 User Profiles Main Area

The User Profiles grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently configured user

profiles.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each user profile includes:

:

8.2.3 User Profile Details Panels

The User Profile Details section is applicable only for s single selected user profile and it includes the

following tabs:

User Profile Details General Tab

User Profile Details Security Assignment Tab

Figure 8-13: The User Profiles Table

Parameter Description

User Profile Name The name of user profile

User Count The number of users to which the user profile is assigned

AlvariSTAR User Manual 270

Page 282: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

8.2.3.1 User Profile Details General Tab

The General tab displays the details configured in the User Profile Editor General tab (see “General Tab”

on page 276).

8.2.3.2 User Profile Details Security Assignment Tab

The Security Assignment tab displays the permissions of the User Profile (see “Security Assignment Tab”

on page 277).

8.2.4 User Profiles Actions Panel

The User Profiles Actions panel includes the following options:

Figure 8-14: The User Profiles Details General Tab

Figure 8-15: The User Profiles Details Security Assignment Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 271

Page 283: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

8.2.5 Find User Profiles Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filtering options are not available for user profiles.

Advanced Filter includes the User Profile Name criterion:

8.2.6 Creating a new User Profile

Click on the New option in the Actions panel. The User Profile editor for a new User Profile opens,

displaying the first (General) step:

1 First Step (General)

Option Action

New Adds a new user profile to the database. Opens the User Profile Editor, allowing to define properties of the user profile to be created. For more details, see “Creating a new User Profile” on page 272.

Edit Not available if two or more user profiles are selected. Opens the User Profile Editor for the selected user profile, allowing to edit some of the user profile’s properties. For more details, see “Editing an existing User Profile” on page 275.

Delete Not available for default user profiles. Deletes the selected user profile(s) from the database. The application prompts you for confirmation.

To create a new User Profile

AlvariSTAR User Manual 272

Page 284: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

The General Step includes the following parameters:

Configure the mandatory User Profile Name. You may also configure optional Description parameter.

The users table contains the details of all users to which the user profile should be assigned.

To add user(s), click on Add. The User Selector window opens. For details see “The User Selector” on

page 268.

Figure 8-16: The User Profile Editor for a new User Profile, First (General) Step

Parameter Description

User Profile Name The name of the user profile. A string of 1 to 32 printable characters. Should contain only characters and numbers. Must be a unique name.

Description An optional information field providing a description of the user profile. A string of 0 to 128 characters.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 273

Page 285: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

You may use the Remove button to remove selected user(s) from the table. You may use the Remove All

button to clear the table.

Click Next to open the second (Security Assignment) step.

2 Second Step (Security Assignment)

The Security Assignment Step includes the read-only User Profile name as configured in the previous

step, and the Functional Permissions assignment table.

The Functional Permissions table allows selecting the functions and associated operations to be available

to users to which the user profile is assigned. By default, all available functions are de-selected.

Select a Functional Permission to see the relevant Operations (such as Delete, Edit, New, etc) that may be

available to users that can use the selected function. The list of available operations depend on the

INFORMATION

Default users cannot be added to the table.

Figure 8-17: The User Profile Editor for a new User Profile, Second (Security Assignment) Step

AlvariSTAR User Manual 274

Page 286: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

selected function. By default, all operations associated with a selected function are enabled. Use the

selector check-boxes to modify the list of operations to be supported for each selected function.

Grant permissions to the user profile by selecting the predefined function check-boxes and possible

operations for. To select/de-select all, use the check-boxes next to the Functional Permissions and/or

Operations titles.

When assignment of Functional Permissions to the new user profiles is completed, click Finish.

8.2.7 Editing an existing User Profile

Select a User Profile and click on the Edit option in the Actions panel. The User Profile editor for an

existing user profile opens. The User Profile editor for an existing user profile has two tabs:

General Tab

Security Assignment Tab

After performing any changes in one or two tabs, click on the OK button to save the changes.

To edit an existing User Profile

AlvariSTAR User Manual 275

Page 287: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

8.2.7.1 General Tab

The General tab includes the following parameters:

The users table contains the details of all users to which the user profile should be assigned.

To add user(s), click on Add. For details see “The User Selector” on page 268.

Figure 8-18: The User Profile Editor General Tab

Parameter Description

User Profile Name Read-only. The User Profile Name as defined when created.

Description An optional information field providing a description of the user profile. A string of 0 to 128 characters.

INFORMATION

Default users cannot be added to the table.

Default Users cannot be removed from default user profiles.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 276

Page 288: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

8.2.7.2 Security Assignment Tab

The Security Assignment tab includes the read-only User Profile name and the Functional Permissions

assignment table.

The Functional Permissions table allows selecting the functions and associated operations to be available

to users to which the user profile is assigned.

Select a Functional Permission to see the relevant Operations (such as Delete, Edit, New, etc) that may be

available to users that can use the selected function. The list of available operations depend on the

selected function. By default, all operations associated with a selected function are enabled. Use the

selector check-boxes to modify the list of operations to be supported for each selected function.

Figure 8-19: The User Editor Security Assignment Tab

INFORMATION

The Security Assignment of default user profiles cannot be edited.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 277

Page 289: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Profiles ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Profiles Manager

Grant permissions to the user profile by selecting the predefined function check-boxes and possible

operations for. To select/de-select all, use the check-boxes next to the Functional Permissions and/or

Operations titles.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 278

Page 290: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Sessions ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Sessions Manager

8.3 User Sessions Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the User Sessions Manager

User Sessions Main Area

User Sessions Actions Panel

Find User Session Panel

8.3.1 Introduction to the User Sessions Manager

The User Session Manager displays information on the currently logged in users and enables sending

messages to a logged in user. Users with Administrator privileges can terminate any session (including

their own session).

Select Administration > User Sessions from the Main Menu. The User Sessions tab is added to the tabs

ribbon and the User Sessions Manager is displayed.

The User Session Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

To open the User Sessions Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 279

Page 291: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Sessions ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Sessions Manager

8.3.2 User Sessions Main Area

The User Sessions grid view comprises a table that includes details on all the currently logged in users.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each user session includes:

:

Figure 8-20: The User Sessions Table

Parameter Description

Username The name of the logged in user

IP Address The IP address of the user client

Login Time Date and time of login

AlvariSTAR User Manual 280

Page 292: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Sessions ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Sessions Manager

8.3.3 User Sessions Actions Panel

The User Sessions Actions panel includes the following options:

8.3.4 Find User Session Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filtering options are not available for user sessions.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

Username

IP Address

Login Time

Option Action

Kill Terminates the client sessions of the selected user(s). Only an Administrator can perform this operation.

Send Message Applicable only for a single selected session. Opens the Sending Message window, enabling you to send a text message to the selected user. An Information box with the text message will be displayed on the destination client.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 281

Page 293: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationThe Audit Logs ManagerChapter 8 - Administration The Audit Logs Manager

8.4 The Audit Logs Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Audit Logs Manager

Audit Logs Main Area

Audit Logs Details Panels

Audit Logs Actions Panel

Find Audit Log Panel

8.4.1 Introduction to the Audit Logs Manager

The management system provides a logging service that records messages to the database upon the

occurrence of pre-specified events. These messages can include event date and time, event type, error

messages and other important information according to the recorded event. The Audit Logs Manager

enables to view details of recorded events and export the logged data to an external Comma Separated

Value (CSV) file.

Select Administration > Audit Logs from the Main Menu. The Audit Logs tab is added to the tabs ribbon

and the Audit Logs Manager is displayed.

To open the Audit Logs Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 282

Page 294: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationThe Audit Logs ManagerChapter 8 - Administration The Audit Logs Manager

8.4.2 Audit Logs Main Area

The Audit Logs grid view comprises a table that includes details on all logged records.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each audit log includes:

:

8.4.3 Audit Logs Details Panels

The Audit Logs Details section provides additional details (if relevant) for the recorded event.

Figure 8-21: The Audit Logs Table

Parameter Description

Event Time The date and time of the event.

Category The event category, which is the management function associated with the event (or System for general events associated with the management system such as user login/logout, Change Password or System Startup).

User ID The name of the relevant user (or SYSTEM for events reported by the management system such as System Startup, Task Finished) or Task Started for tasks initiated by the management system).

Action The reported action

Target Entity The element which is the target of the relevant action (e.g a task name).

Entity Type The type of the Target Entity (e.g. a task’s type).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 283

Page 295: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationThe Audit Logs ManagerChapter 8 - Administration The Audit Logs Manager

8.4.4 Audit Logs Actions Panel

The Audit Logs Actions panel includes the following option:

8.4.5 Find Audit Log Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search option is not available for audit logs.

Pre-defined Filter includes filtering by Category. Available options include only categories that are

actually available in the database. Each Category will be accompanied by the current total number of

relevant instances in the database.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

User ID

Action

Target Entity

Entity Type

Event Time

Option Action

Export Exports the details of the selected log event(s) to an external Comma Separated Value (CSV) file. All details of selected event(s) are exported, including columns that are currently hidden. Opens the Exports Audit Logs dialog box in which you can browse to the desired location, enter a file name, and click Save. The information for the selected event(s) is exported.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 284

Page 296: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager

8.5 Licenses Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Licenses Manager

Licenses Main Area

License Details Panels

Licenses Actions Panel

Find License Panel

NMS_Rescue License

8.5.1 Introduction to the Licenses Manager

A license defines the supported features and the number of different types of equipment that can be

managed by the management system. The Licenses Manager provides information about features and

equipment supported by each of the currently installed licenses, server information included in each

license and license expiration date. It also enables adding licenses and activating a new license.

Select Administration > Licenses from the Main Menu. The Licenses tab is added to the tabs ribbon and

the Licenses Manager is displayed.

The License Manager is not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility.

To open the Licenses Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 285

Page 297: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager

8.5.2 Licenses Main Area

The Licenses grid view comprises a table that includes details on all currently installed licenses.

Refer to “Using the Grid View” on page 18 for details on manipulating the grid view.

By default, the read-only information displayed for each Licenses includes:

:

8.5.3 License Details Panels

The Licenses Details panel is applicable only for a single selected license. It includes the following tabs:

License Basic

License Features

Equipment

Figure 8-22: The Licenses Table

Parameter Description

License Name The name of the license.

Install Date The date and time at which the license was installed.

User ID The name of the relevant user (or SYSTEM for events reported by the management system such as System Startup, Task Finished) or Task Started for tasks initiated by the management system).

Active The activity status of the license (active/inactive). Only one license can be active.

Expires On The expiration date of the license.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 286

Page 298: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager

8.5.3.1 License Basic

The License Basic tab provides the following details

License Name

Install date & Time

Activation Status

Expires on Date & time

Licensed IP Address

Licensed MAC Address

8.5.3.2 License Features

Some features of the management system are licensed features. The License Features tab provides a list

of the features supported by the license.

Figure 8-23: License Details, License Basic Tab

Figure 8-24: License Details, License Features Tab

AlvariSTAR User Manual 287

Page 299: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager

8.5.3.3 Equipment

The Equipment tab provide details on the number of devices of each type supported by the license. For

each equipment type the number of currently used licenses (managed devices of the relevant type) is

shown.

When the number of discovered devices (managed devices) reaches the number of licensed devices,

additional discovered devices are marked as unlicensed (see Management Status in “Equipment List Grid

View” on page 29).

When considering future expansion plans, the number of licensed devices compared with the number of

managed devices of each type, will indicate whether there is a need for an updated license.

The Equipment tab provides also licensing details on the number of clients that can access the system

simultaneously and the number of currently active clients.

8.5.4 Licenses Actions Panel

The Licenses Actions panel includes the following options:

Figure 8-25: License Details, Equipment Tab

Option Action

Add Click to install a new license. The new license must be available in the client’s file system. Opens the Open window in which you can browse to the desired location, select the license file name, and click Open to add the new license.

Alternatively, you can save the license file in the /<Management_System>/file system/license folder. The next time the server will be restarted, the new license will also be added.

Activate Activate the selected inactive license. The previously active licensed will be de-activated.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 288

Page 300: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationLicenses ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Licenses Manager

8.5.5 Find License Panel

For general details on using the different search and filtering options refer to “Find Panel” on page 12.

The simple Search and Pre-Defined Filter options are not available for licenses.

Advanced Filters include the following criteria:

License

Active

Install Date

8.5.6 NMS_Rescue License

The system is provided with a default license called NMS_Rescue. This license has no expiration date and

it supports a single client and no other equipment/features. The NMS_Rescue license is activated

automatically if there is no other license currently active, allowing the user to login and add a new valid

license. This prevents the user from being locked out of the application if the current license expires.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 289

Page 301: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationPassword Policy ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Password Policy Manager

8.6 Password Policy Manager

The Password Policy Manager enables setting general policies for user passwords, such as required

length, required characters, expiration policy.

Select Administration > Password Policy from the Main Menu. The Password Policy tab is added to the

tabs ribbon and the Password Policy Manager is displayed:

The Password Policy Manager includes the following parameters:

To open the Password Policy Manager

Figure 8-26: The Password Policy Manager

Parameter Description

Minimum Password Length Sets the minimum length of accepted passwords. Any password with less than the set minimum will be rejected.

Value range: 1 - 32.

Maximum Password Length The maximum length allowed for a password. The maximum length is pre-set to 32 characters and cannot be changed.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 290

Page 302: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationPassword Policy ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Password Policy Manager

Character Setting Rules Select/de-select the following check-boxes:

Lower Case: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one lower case character.

Upper Case: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one upper case character.

Numbers: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one digit.

Special Characters: When selected, a new password will be required to include at least one special character, e.g. <, >, /, *, &, ^, $, #,!.

Login Attempts The number of allowed erroneous login attempts before the application is closed and the user is blocked.

This parameter can be configured for a selected user from the User Manager. In case of contradiction, the parameter set in the User Manager overrides the general policy for the specific user.

Value range: 3 - 20

Password Expiration Age The time in months before the user is required to change the password.

This parameter can be configured for a selected user from the User Manager. In case of contradiction, the parameter set in the User Manager overrides the general policy for the specific user.

From the User Manager you can set the password expiration policy for a selected user to never expire.

Value range: 1 - 12

Password Expiration Warning The number of days before a user password expires during which a message requiring to change the password is displayed. The message is displayed at every login until the password expiration age is reached.

Value range: 1 - 14

Password History The number of old passwords for the system to keep a record. The user will not be able to repeat a password included in the password history records.

Value range: 0 - 10

Inactivity Session Timeout

Not applicable to the Local CRAFT Utility

The number of minutes with no user activity, after which the user is logged out. The user will be required to log in again to continue working.

Value range: 0 - 100

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 291

Page 303: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationPassword Policy ManagerChapter 8 - Administration Password Policy Manager

INFORMATION

All password policy parameters except Inactivity Session Timeout do not apply to external users (see “External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295)

AlvariSTAR User Manual 292

Page 304: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Domain ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Domain Manager

8.7 User Domain Manager

The User Domain Manager is used to allocate location visibility domains to each user that is not an

administrator (administrators are always able to see all network elements in every location). A domain is

a group of Network Elements that are located in one or multiple areas. Therefore, domains are defined

by selecting specific locations that have been previously defined in the Locations Manager (see “The

Locations Manager” on page 95).

By default, users are not assigned to any domain, thus being able to see all network elements. A user

with an assigned domain can only view and manage the network elements and related objects inside

that domain or the ones that have no assigned location.

By default, users are not assigned to any domain, thus being able to see all network elements. A user

who is assigned to a domain, can only view and manage the network elements and related objects

inside that domain or the ones that have no domain associated. The following features are impacted:

Equipment Manager: Only equipment in the current users’s domain and equipment with no assigned

location are visible

File Manager: Only files pertaining to equipment in the current user’s domain and imported files are

visible.

Active Events/Event History: Only events pertaining to equipment in the current user’s domain are

visible

Tasks Manager: All tasks are displayed, but edit and run operations only work for equipment in the

current user’s domain.

Location Manager: All locations are displayed, but only locations associated to the current user’s

domain can be edited.

Selectors: Relevant selectors (Equipment, File, Location) implement domain based filtering

Select Administration > User Domain Manager from the Main Menu. The User Domain Manager tab is

added to the tabs ribbon and the User Domain Manager is displayed:

To open the User Domain Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 293

Page 305: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationUser Domain ManagerChapter 8 - Administration User Domain Manager

1 In the User field, use the drop-down users list to select the user whose domain should be edited.

2 In the Assigned Locations field, select/de-select locations so that all locations you want to assigned to

the selected user, and only these locations, are selected.

3 Click on the Save button to apply the new domain assignment (to cancel all changes, click on the

Revert button before clicking Save).

Figure 8-27: The User Domain Manager

To edit the domain assigned to a specific user:

INFORMATION

The list of users include local users (default users and additional users defined in the User Manager) and, if applicable, external users (see “External Entities Mapping Manager” on page 295).

AlvariSTAR User Manual 294

Page 306: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationExternal Entities Mapping ManagerChapter 8 - Administration External Entities Mapping Manager

8.8 External Entities Mapping Manager

If you are using an LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) server for user account management,

you can map existing LDAP entities to specific user profiles defined in the management system.

Select Administration > External Entities Mapping from the Main Menu. The External Entities Mapping

tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the External Entities Mapping Manager is displayed:

INFORMATION The external LDAP connection is disabled by default. If you want to enable it, follow these steps:

1 Go to <NMS_Installation_Path>\jboss\server\nms\deploy\bwanms.sar\conf

2 Edit the appserver.properties file

3 Look for the com.bwanms.backend.security.externalLDAPEnabled entry

4 Change its value from false to true

5 Restart the NMS server

In addition, refer to Appendix B for details on setting up a connection to a typical LDAP server.

To open the External Entities Mapping Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 295

Page 307: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationExternal Entities Mapping ManagerChapter 8 - Administration External Entities Mapping Manager

The External Entities Mapping Manager includes the following parameters:

Figure 8-28: The External Entities Mapping Manager

Parameter Description

Global Default User Profile Use the drop-down list of user profiles to assign a default user profile to entities defined in the LDAP server that are not explicitly mapped to any user profile.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 296

Page 308: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 8 - AdministrationExternal Entities Mapping ManagerChapter 8 - Administration External Entities Mapping Manager

When you are done defining a mapping rule, click Add to confirm it. The rule will be visible in the

mapping table.

To remove an active rule, select it from the mapping table and click Remove.

After completing all changes in mapping rules, Click OK to apply the changes.

External Entity Type Select an entity from the LDAP server that you wish to map to one or multiple user profiles. You can either choose:

A group of users, or

A specific user (in which case the group(s) it belongs to will be displayed below, in the Member of text box).

User Profiles Select one or more user profiles you wish to map to the external entity.

Use the > button to map individual user profiles that are available

Use the >> button to map all the user profiles that are available

Use the < button to unmap individual user profiles that have been previously mapped

Use the << button to unmap all the user profiles that have been previously mapped

Parameter Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 297

Page 309: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuite

In This Chapter:

The StarSuite menu includes the following managers:

“Reports Manager” on page 299

“Charts Manager” on page 308

In addition, the menu includes cut-through links to StarQuality and StarACS management applications. The

links are available provided that the relevant management application is up and running and that the

connection is configured properly (see “Application Configuration” on page 232). Click on a management

application link to open it in a separate window.

Page 310: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

9.1 Reports Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Reports Manager

Reports

9.1.1 Introduction to the Reports Manager

The Report Manager enables generating different inventory or configuration reports for relevant devices

managed by the system.

Select StarSuite > Reports from the Main Menu. The Reports tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the

Reports Manager is displayed:

Click on a selected Run Report button to generate the required report.

For certain reports the requested report will be generated by default for all relevant entities.

For most reports a Parameter selection window will open, enabling selection of the entities for which

the requested report will be generated. The default selection for all reports is “All”. To generate a report

for selected entities select the entities you want to be included in the report. You may use the traditional

Shift-Click and Ctrl-Click selection/de-selection methods. Click OK to generate the report for the

selected entities. The report will be displayed in a new Windows Internet Explorer window/tab using

BIRT (Business Intelligence and Reporting Tools) Report Viewer.

To open the Reports Manager

Figure 9-1: The Reports Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 299

Page 311: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

9.1.2 Reports

The available reports depend on the installed device drivers:

General Inventory Reports

Extreme BTS Related Reports

COMPACT BTS Related Reports

4Motion BTS Related Reports

9.1.2.1 General Inventory Reports

The following General Inventory Reports are applicable for all currently supported product families:

Equipment Inventory: Provides general details (BTS Model, BTS Name, BTS Number, BTS Location,

Management IP Address) and inventory count details for hardware entities (such as GPS, Antenna and

other components if applicable) available for each of the selected devices. In addition, the report

includes a summary count of all relevant entities.

Detailed Equipment Inventory: Provides general details (BTS Model, BTS Name, BTS Number, BTS

Location, Management IP Address) and main hardware (Serial Number, Hardware Version, Hardware

Revision) and software (Operational Software Version, Boot Software Version) details for each of the

relevant entities.

9.1.2.2 Extreme BTS Related Reports

The Quick View Configuration report for Extreme provides the following configuration details for each

BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:

BTS:

» BTS Name

» DFS Type (if applicable)

» Uplink/Downlink Ratio

» Radio Operation Mode

BS:

» Serving BS ID/BS ID (BS Index)

» Diversity Mode

AlvariSTAR User Manual 300

Page 312: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

Sector:

» Sector ID

» Bandwidth (MHz)

» Frequency (MHz)

» Tx Power (in dBm)

» Current Dynamic Channel Selection (if applicable)

Radio:

» Radio Channel ID

» Operational Status

Antenna:

» Antenna Number

» Antenna Type

» Current Antenna Gain (dB)

GPS:

» GPS Type

» GPS No of Satellites

9.1.2.3 COMPACT BTS Related Reports

The COMPACT BTS Related Reports includes the following:

COMPACT Quick View Configuration

COMPACT Detailed View Configuration

COMPACT Neighboring Relation Configuration

9.1.2.3.1 COMPACT Quick View ConfigurationThe Quick View Configuration report for COMPACT provides the following configuration details for

each BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:

BTS Number

BS ID

AlvariSTAR User Manual 301

Page 313: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

General:

» Preamble Group

» Segment Number

» DL Diversity Mode

» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)

» Scheduler Mode

Permutation:

» Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base

» Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base

» Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base

Map:

» Minimum Size (symbols)

» Basic Map Repetition

Power Control: Allowed Interference Level

Basic Rate:

» Basic Rate

» Basic Rate for Management

» Basic Rate for Data

» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level

» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level

9.1.2.3.2 COMPACT Detailed View ConfigurationThe Detailed View Configuration report for COMPACT provides the following configuration details for

each BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:

BTS Number

BS ID

AlvariSTAR User Manual 302

Page 314: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

Frame Structure:

» Bandwidth (MHz)

» Center Frequency (MHz)

» Total UL Duration (Slots)

» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)

» Minimum Size (symbols)

» Maximum Size (symbols)

» Basic Map Repetition

» Segment Number

» Cell ID

» Preamble Group

» Preamble Index

» DL Diversity Mode

» Scheduler Mode

Permutation:

» Start of Ranging Codes

» DL Data Zone Permutation Base

» UL Feedback Zone Permutation Base

» UL Data Zone Permutation Base

Basic Rate:

» Basic Rate UL

» Basic Rate for Management

» Basic Rate for Data

» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level

» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level

AlvariSTAR User Manual 303

Page 315: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

Power Control:

» Allowed Interference Level

» Target Ni (dBm)

» Required C/N Levels (in dB) for transmission of ACK, CQI, CDMA, QPSK 1/2, etc.

Mobility: Deployment

9.1.2.3.3 COMPACT Neighboring Relation ConfigurationThe Neighboring Relation Configuration report for COMPACT provides the following configuration

details for each COMPACT BS with configured neighbors (in mixed deployments these can also be

4Motion BSs):

Handover Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Handover Request trigger:

» Neighbor BS ID

» Trigger Type

» Trigger Value

Scan Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Scan Request trigger:

» Neighbor BS ID

» Trigger Type

» Trigger Value

9.1.2.4 4Motion BTS Related Reports

The 4Motion BTS Related Reports includes the following:

4Motion Quick View Configuration

4Motion Detailed View Configuration

4Motion Neighboring Relation Configuration

9.1.2.4.1 4Motion Quick View ConfigurationThe Quick View Configuration report for 4Motion provides the following configuration details for each

BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:

BTS Number

BS ID

AlvariSTAR User Manual 304

Page 316: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

General:

» Preamble Group

» Segment Number

» DL Diversity Mode

» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)

» Scheduler Mode

Permutation:

» Downlink Data Zone Permutation Base

» Uplink Feedback Zone Permutation Base

» Uplink Data Zone Permutation Base

Map:

» Minimum Size (symbols)

» Basic Map Repetition

Power Control: Allowed Interference Level

Basic Rate:

» Basic Rate

» Basic Rate for Management

» Basic Rate for Data

» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level

» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level

9.1.2.4.2 4Motion Detailed View ConfigurationThe Detailed View Configuration report for 4Motion provides the following configuration details for

each BS included in the list of selected BS IDs:

BTS Number

BS ID

AlvariSTAR User Manual 305

Page 317: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

Frame Structure:

» Bandwidth (MHz)

» Center Frequency (MHz)

» Total UL Duration (Slots)

» Maximum Cell Radius (Km)

» Minimum Size (symbols)

» Maximum Size (symbols)

» Basic Map Repetition

» Segment Number

» Cell ID

» Preamble Group

» Preamble Index

» DL Diversity Mode

» Scheduler Mode

Permutation:

» Start of Ranging Codes

» DL Data Zone Permutation Base

» UL Feedback Zone Permutation Base

» UL Data Zone Permutation Base

Basic Rate:

» Basic Rate UL

» Basic Rate for Management

» Basic Rate for Data

» Scheduler DL Abuse Protection Level

» Scheduler UL Abuse Protection Level

AlvariSTAR User Manual 306

Page 318: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteReports ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Reports Manager

Power Control:

» Allowed Interference Level

» Target Ni (dBm)

» Required C/N Levels (in dB) for transmission of ACK, CQI, CDMA, QPSK 1/2, etc.

Mobility: Deployment

Beam Forming:

» Calibration Attenuator

» Neighbor Beam Forming

9.1.2.4.3 4Motion Neighboring Relation ConfigurationThe Neighboring Relation Configuration report for 4Motion provides the following configuration details

for each 4Motion BS with configured neighbors (in mixed deployments these can also be COMPACT

BSs):

Handover Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Handover Request trigger:

» Neighbor BS ID

» Trigger Type

» Trigger Value

Scan Request triggers table: Provides for each configured Scan Request trigger:

» Neighbor BS ID

» Trigger Type

» Trigger Value

AlvariSTAR User Manual 307

Page 319: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

9.2 Charts Manager

This section includes:

Introduction to the Charts Manager

Managing a Graph/Chart

Available Graphs/Charts

9.2.1 Introduction to the Charts Manager

The Charts manager enables viewing factory defined charts and graphs. The availability of certain

charts/graphs depend on the available management applications (StarQuality and StarACS) and types of

managed equipment.

Select StarSuite > Charts from the Main Menu. The Charts tab is added to the tabs ribbon and the

Charts Manager is displayed:

9.2.2 Managing a Graph/Chart

Each graph/chart includes the following controls:

To open the Charts Manager

Figure 9-2: The Charts Manager

AlvariSTAR User Manual 308

Page 320: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

9.2.3 Available Graphs/Charts

The following graphs and charts are available:

Graphs/Charts that are always available - all product families

Graphs available if StarQuality is available

Charts available if StarACS is available

Charts available for Extreme

9.2.3.1 Graphs/Charts that are always available - all product families

The graphs and charts detailed below are based on information retrieved from the management

system’s database and are always available. Configuration options for each graph/chart are also

provided. Default values are emphasized (bold):

Table 9-1: Graph/Chart Controls

Control Description

Configure Click to switch to configuration mode, allowing you to configure the following:

Polling: The refresh rate (where applicable).

Duration: Applicable only for graphs. Each graph presents the relevant data using a time axis, ascending to the right. The right-most point is the last refreshed one. The left-most point is defined by the duration parameter.

Hide Legends check box. The default is selected (hide legends). De-select to display legends. When legends are displayed a check-box next to each legend enables selecting/de-selecting the relevant instance (by default all legends are selected).

Click Back to apply changes and exit configuration mode.

Expand/Restore Click Expand to use full screen for displaying the graph/chart. Click Restore to exit full screen mode.

Print Click to print the graph/chart.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 309

Page 321: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

Table 9-2: Supported Graphs/Charts that are always available

Name Description Refresh Rate Duration

Alarms Graph Linear graphs of no. of open BTS summarized alarms, classified per severity vs. time.

10 seconds

20 seconds

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

Alarms Distribution Chart

A bar-chart of no. of currently-open BTS summarized alarms, classified per severity.

10 seconds

20 seconds

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

N/A

BTSs Management Chart

A pie-chart of BTS management status distribution.

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

N/A

AlvariSTAR User Manual 310

Page 322: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

BTSs Management Graph

Linear graphs of BTS management status vs. time.

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

BTSs Operability Chart

A pie-chart of BTS operational state distribution.

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

N/A

BTSs Operability Graph

Linear graphs of BTS operational state vs. time.

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

Table 9-2: Supported Graphs/Charts that are always available

Name Description Refresh Rate Duration

AlvariSTAR User Manual 311

Page 323: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

9.2.3.2 Graphs available if StarQuality is available

The graphs detailed below are based on information recorded by StarQuality for the last 15-minutes

period. Configuration options for each graph are also provided. Default values are emphasized (bold):

BTSs SW Versions Chart

A pie chart of BTS SW versions distribution. 1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

N/A

Table 9-3: Supported Graphs if StarQuality is available

Name Description Refresh Rate Duration

MSs Registration Graph

A linear graph of total number of number of registered MSs of the BTSs, vs. time.

Applicable only for 4Motion/BreezeCOMPACT MSs

15 minutes

1 hour

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

1 hour

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

Total UL/ DL Throughput Graph

A linear graph of BTSs total throughput (sum of all relevant AUs throughput in the network), separately for uplink and downlink, vs. time.

15 minutes (fixed)

2 hours

5 hours

12 hours

24 hours

Table 9-2: Supported Graphs/Charts that are always available

Name Description Refresh Rate Duration

AlvariSTAR User Manual 312

Page 324: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

9.2.3.3 Charts available if StarACS is available

The charts detailed below are based on information recorded by StarACS for the last 24 hours period.

These charts are applicable only for COMPACT/4Motion BTSs. Configuration options for each chart are

also provided. Default values are emphasized (bold):

9.2.3.4 Charts available for Extreme

The charts detailed below are based on information retrieved from AlvariSTAR database and are

applicable only for Extreme BTSs. In these charts, the Refresh Rate is fixed at 5 minutes and the Duration

parameter is not applicable.

For each KPI, both a pie chart and a 3D bar chart are available:

Table 9-4: Supported Charts if StarACS is available

Name Description Refresh Rate Duration

MSs Types Chart A pie-chart of MSs type distribution.

Data Source: StarACS

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

N/A

MSs Profiles Chart A pie-chart of MSs service profiles distribution.

Data Source: StarACS

1 minute

2 minutes

5 minutes

10 minutes

20 minutes

1 hour

N/A

AlvariSTAR User Manual 313

Page 325: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts

Name Description

Number of Satellites in Use

A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of devices with the "Current number of satellites in use" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of devices for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

Average sector CINR of UL for All MSs

A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "Average sector CINR of UL for all served MSs" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 4

Between 5 and 10

Between 11 and 14

Between 15 and 20

21 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

Average sector CINR of UL for All MSs is calculated as sum over all MSs of last Uplink CINR measurement divided by the number of served MSs.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 314

Page 326: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

Average Sector CINR of DL for All MSs

A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "Average sector CINR of UL for all served MSs" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 4

Between 5 and 10

Between 11 and 14

Between 15 and 20

21 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

Average sector CINR of UL for All MSs is calculated as sum over all MSs of last Downlink CINR measurement divided by the number of served MSs.

UL Modulation in Use

A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the “UL Modulation in Use per sector” KPI for each UL Rate.

The UL Modulation in Use is calculated using numbers to represent the different modulation rates (Modulation Number) and calculating the rounded sum over all MSs of last Uplink Modulation Number divided by the number of served MSs. The resulting average modulation number is translated to the relevant modulation rate. See details of uplink modulation numbers in Table 9-6 below.

Note: There is no rate with modulation number 7. If the calculated KPI is between 6.5 and 7 inclusive, it is considered as 6 (QAM16-CTC-3/4). If the calculated KPI is between 7 and 7.5, it is considered as 8 (QAM64-CTC-2/3).

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts

Name Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 315

Page 327: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

DL Modulation in Use

A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the “DL Modulation in Use per sector” KPI for each DL Rate.

The DL Modulation in Use is calculated using numbers to represent the different modulation rates (Modulation Number) and calculating the rounded sum over all MSs of last Downlink Modulation Number divided by the number of served MSs. The resulting average modulation number is translated to the relevant modulation rate. See details of downlink modulation numbers in Table 9-7 below.

Note: There is no rate with modulation number 7. If the calculated KPI is between 6.5 and 7 inclusive, it is considered as 6 (QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO A). If the calculated KPI is between 7 and 7.5, it is considered as 8 (QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO A).

There is also no rate with modulation number 17. If the calculated KPI is between 16.5 and 17 inclusive, it is considered as 16 (QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO B). If the calculated KPI is between 17 and 17.5, it is considered as 18 (QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO B).

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

UL NACK Rate A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "UL NACK rate" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 2.9999 (%)

Between 3 and 9.9999 (%)

10 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

Uplink NACK rate is computed using the following formula:

UL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

NACK Frames = number of non-acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames = number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts

Name Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 316

Page 328: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

DL NACK Rate A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "DL NACK rate" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 2.9999 (%)

Between 3 and 9.9999 (%)

10 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

Downlink NACK rate is computed using the following formula:

DL NACK = 100*SUM(NACK Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

NACK Frames = number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames = number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

UL Dropped Bursts A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "UL Dropped bursts" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 3

Between 4 and 5

6 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

UL Dropped bursts is computed using the following formula: 100*SUM(Dropped Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

Dropped Frames = number of dropped uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames = number of acknowledged uplink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts

Name Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 317

Page 329: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

DL Dropped Bursts A pie-chart/3D bar-chart displaying the percentage/number of sectors with the "DL Dropped bursts" KPI having the following values:

Between 0 and 3

Between 4 and 5

6 or more

The system shall also represent on the chart the percentage/number of sectors for which the system was unable to collect this KPI during the last 5 minutes interval.

DL Dropped bursts is computed using the following formula: 100*SUM(Dropped Frames/ACK Frames)/Number of MSs.

where:

Dropped Frames = number of non-acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

ACK Frames = number of acknowledged downlink frames per MS during the last 5 minutes interval.

Note: if for a certain MS number of acknowledged frames is zero, the MS shall not be taken into consideration when performing the average.

Table 9-6: Uplink Modulation Number

Rate Modulation Number

QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP4 1

QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP2 2

QPSK-CTC-1/2 3

QPSK-CTC-3/4 4

QAM16-CTC-1/2 5

QAM16-CTC-3/4 6

QAM64-CTC-2/3 8

QAM64-CTC-3/4 9

QAM64-CTC-5/6 10

Table 9-7: Downlink Modulation Number

Rate Modulation Number

QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP4, MIMO A 1

Table 9-5: Supported Extreme Performance Charts

Name Description

AlvariSTAR User Manual 318

Page 330: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Chapter 9 - StarSuiteCharts ManagerChapter 9 - StarSuite Charts Manager

QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP2, MIMO A 2

QPSK-CTC-1/2, MIMO A 3

QPSK-CTC-3/4, MIMO A 4

QAM16-CTC-1/2, MIMO A 5

QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO A 6

QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO A 8

QAM64-CTC-3/4, MIMO A 9

QAM64-CTC-5/6, MIMO A 10

QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP4, MIMO B 11

QPSK-CTC-1/2 REP2, MIMO B 12

QPSK-CTC-1/2, MIMO AB 13

QPSK-CTC-3/4, MIMO B 14

QAM16-CTC-1/2, MIMO B 15

QAM16-CTC-3/4, MIMO B 16

QAM64-CTC-2/3, MIMO B 18

QAM64-CTC-3/4, MIMO B 19

QAM64-CTC-5/6, MIMO B 20

Table 9-7: Downlink Modulation Number

Rate Modulation Number

AlvariSTAR User Manual 319

Page 331: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix A - WatchdogAppendix A - Watchdog

Appendix A - Watchdog

AlvariSTAR User Manual 320

Page 332: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix A - WatchdogAppendix A - Watchdog

In This Appendix:

“The Watchdog Application” on page 322

AlvariSTAR User Manual 321

Page 333: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix A - WatchdogThe Watchdog ApplicationAppendix A - Watchdog The Watchdog Application

A.1 The Watchdog Application

Watchdog is an external application for monitoring the NMS server, LDAP and database servers

(providing they reside on the same machine as the NMS). The NMS watchdog service is started when the

NMS server is started.

In case the server or LDAP are down, Watchdog will try to restart them. The monitoring information and

the actions involved in restarting the NMS server or LDAP are written in the watchdog.log file. The log is

saved daily to <Management System Root>\<NMS installation folder>\watchdog\watchdog.log.YYYY-MM-DD

Watchdog can be configured from the watchdog.properties file located in <Management System

Root>\<NMS installation folder>\watchdog.

Watchdog logs can be automatically deleted by configuring the following two parameters (in red text) in

the log4j.xml file located in <Management System Root>\<NMS installation folder>\watchdog.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

<?xml version=”1.0” encoding=”UTF-8” ?>

<!DOCTYPE log4j:configuration SYSTEM “log4j.dtd”>

<log4j:configuration xmlns:log4j=”http://jakarta.apache.org/log4j/”>

<appender name=”LOG_SHRINK” class=”com.bwanms.watchdogcommon.SizeShrinkAppender”>

<param name=”File” value=”${nms.root}/watchdog/log/dummy.log”/>

<param name=”MaxFileSize” value=”10KB”/>

<param name=”MaxBackupIndex” value=”1”/>

<param name=”RetainsDays” value=”10”/>

<!-- max log files size (ex.: 10KB, 20MB, 3GB, 100) -->

<param name=”MaxFilesSize” value=”10MB”/>

<layout class=”org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout”>

<param name=”ConversionPattern” value=”%d %-5r %-5p [%c{2}] (%t:%x) %m%n”/>

</layout>

</appender>

AlvariSTAR User Manual 322

Page 334: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix A - WatchdogThe Watchdog ApplicationAppendix A - Watchdog The Watchdog Application

<appender name=”FILE” class=”org.apache.log4j.DailyRollingFileAppender”>

<param name=”File” value=”${nms.root}/watchdog/log/watchdog.log” />

<!-- Rollover at midnight each day -->

<param name=”DatePattern” value=”’.’yyyy-MM-dd”/>

<layout class=”org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout”>

<param name=”ConversionPattern” value=”%d{ABSOLUTE} %5p %c{1} - %m%n”/>

</layout>

</appender>

<appender name=”stdout” class=”org.apache.log4j.ConsoleAppender”>

<layout class=”org.apache.log4j.PatternLayout”>

<param name=”ConversionPattern” value=”%d{ABSOLUTE} %5p %c{1} - %m%n”/>

</layout>

<filter class=”org.apache.log4j.varia.LevelRangeFilter”>

<param name=”LevelMin” value=”INFO” />

<param name=”LevelMax” value=”INFO” />

</filter>

</appender>

<root>

<priority value=”INFO” />

<appender-ref ref=”FILE”/>

<appender-ref ref=”LOG_SHRINK”/>

<appender-ref ref=”stdout”/>

</root>

</log4j:configuration>

AlvariSTAR User Manual 323

Page 335: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server

AlvariSTAR User Manual 324

Page 336: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server

In This Appendix:

This appendix describes how to set up a connection to a typical LDAP server:

“The LDAP Server Configuration File” on page 326

“Open LDAP Configuration” on page 327

“Active Directory Configuration” on page 328

AlvariSTAR User Manual 325

Page 337: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerThe LDAP Server Configuration FileAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server The LDAP Server Configuration File

B.1 The LDAP Server Configuration File

To set up the parameters for connecting to an external LDAP server:

1 Go to <NMS path>\jboss\server\nms\deploy\bwanms.sar\conf

2 Open the external-ldap.properties file.

3 Edit the LDIF entries in this file, so that they apply to the corresponding LDAP server.

See “Open LDAP Configuration” on page 327 and “Active Directory Configuration” on page 328 for

examples on how to configure the external-ldap.properties file.

AlvariSTAR User Manual 326

Page 338: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerOpen LDAP ConfigurationAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server Open LDAP Configuration

B.2 Open LDAP Configuration

The example below illustrates a typical configuration for connecting to an Open LDAP server (installed by

default from the Solaris CD).

java.naming.factory.initial = com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory

java.naming.provider.url = ldap://192.168.10.171:10389

java.naming.security.authentication = simple

rootDN = cn=Directory Manager

rootPW = nssecret

ldapSuffix = dc=testing,dc=ldap

principalCNPrefix = ou=

principalCN = People

principalDNPrefix = cn=

groupCNPrefix = ou=

groupCN = Groups

groupDNPrefix = cn=

userObjectClass = inetOrgPerson

groupObjectClass = groupofUniqueNames

usernameAttribute = cn

#accountNameAttribute = sAMAccountName

groupNameAttribute = cn

groupDescriptionAttribute = description

groupMembersAttribute = uniquemember

AlvariSTAR User Manual 327

Page 339: Alvaristar 6.0 User Manual Alvarion

Appendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP ServerActive Directory ConfigurationAppendix B - Connecting to an External LDAP Server Active Directory Configuration

B.3 Active Directory Configuration

The example below illustrates a typical configuration for connecting to an Active Directory server.

java.naming.factory.initial = com.sun.jndi.ldap.LdapCtxFactory

java.naming.provider.url = ldap://192.168.10.120:389

java.naming.security.authentication = simple

rootDN = cn=Administrator,cn=Users,dc=nms,dc=local

rootPW = alpha

ldapSuffix = dc=nms,dc=local

principalCNPrefix = cn=

principalCN = Users

principalDNPrefix = cn=

groupCNPrefix = cn=

groupCN = Users

groupDNPrefix = cn=

userObjectClass = organizationalPerson

groupObjectClass = group

usernameAttribute = cn

accountNameAttribute = sAMAccountName

groupNameAttribute = cn

groupDescriptionAttribute = description

groupMembersAttribute = member

AlvariSTAR User Manual 328